Toshiba 15Lv505 Service Manual 51T 01P COVER.p65

15LV505 15LV505

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-15Lv505-Service-Manual-131950 toshiba-15lv505-service-manual-131950 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 100

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

FILE NO. 810-200882GR

SERVICE MANUAL

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD
COMBINATION

15LV505

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.
This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green
product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).
For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.
©2008 Toshiba Corporation

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN

(*1)

GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling
and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any
marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.
Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation
recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to
enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,
Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,
parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.
Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in
manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2)

LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer
products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in
the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING
This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !
The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F
(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made
with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great
care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially
when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat
required to melt lead-free solder is high.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
• LEAD-FREE SOLDER
• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• OWNER'S MANUAL
CAUTION .....................................................................................................................................
SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING ....................................................................................
HOW TO ORDER PARTS ..........................................................................................................
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................
PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ................................................................................
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE ..............................................................................................
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS .............................................
2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .....................................................................................
3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ................................................
SERVICE MODE LIST .................................................................................................................
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC .........................................................................
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .....................................................................................................
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ...........................................................................................................................................
POWER .....................................................................................................................................
POWER(DIGITAL PCB) ..........................................................................................................
SIGNAL .....................................................................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD MT .....................................................................................................................................
DIGITAL ....................................................................................................................................
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW .................................................................................
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON .........................................................................................
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP .................................................................................................
MEMORY ...................................................................................................................................
MOTOR DRIVE .........................................................................................................................
AUDIO/VIDEO ..........................................................................................................................
MICON .......................................................................................................................................
SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO ..........................................................................................................
TUNER ......................................................................................................................................
HDMI ..........................................................................................................................................
LVDS ..........................................................................................................................................
SCALER POWER .....................................................................................................................
FLASH .......................................................................................................................................
DDR ...........................................................................................................................................
JACK ..........................................................................................................................................
AV SWITCH ..............................................................................................................................
REGULATOR ...........................................................................................................................
POWER .....................................................................................................................................
BACKLIGHT INVERTER .........................................................................................................
SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................................
JACK OUT ................................................................................................................................
SW .............................................................................................................................................
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................
WAVEFORMS ...............................................................................................................................
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW ..............................................................................................
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..............................................................................
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................

A1-1
A1-2
A1-2
A1-3~A1-5
A1-6
A1-7
A1-7
A1-8
A2-1~A2-8
B1-1, B1-2
B2-1, B2-2
B3-1, B3-2
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-3
D-1~D-5
E-1~E-9
F-1,
F-3,
F-5,
F-7,

F-2
F-4
F-6
F-8

G-1,
G-3,
G-5,
G-7,

G-2
G-4
G-6
G-8

H-1, H-2
H-3, H-4
H-5, H-6
H-7, H-8
H-9, H-10
H-11, H-12
H-13, H-14
H-15, H-16
H-17, H-18
H-19, H-20
H-21, H-22
H-23, H-24
H-25, H-26
H-27, H-28
H-29, H-30
H-31, H-32
H-33, H-34
H-35, H-36
H-37, H-38
H-39, H-40
H-41, H-42
I-1, I-2
J1-1~J1-3
J2-1
K1-1
K2-1
K3-1~K3-4

How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions
in this manual and checking the section
“Troubleshooting,” you ﬁnd that service is needed:
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty
service for your LCD TV/DVD Combination,
contact TACP·s Consumer Solution Center toll
free at 1-800-631-3811.
(2) You must include a copy or original bill of
sale or other proof of purchase along with
the entire LCD TV/DVD Combination to the
Depot Warranty Repair Center speciﬁed by
the TACP Consumer Solutions Center. You
are responsible for all inbound transportation
and insurance charges for the LCD TV/DVD
Combination to the Depot Warranty Repair
Center speciﬁed by the TACP Consumer
Solutions Center.
For additional information, visit TACP·s website:
www.tacp.toshiba.com

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company
is authorized to change, modify, or extend
the terms of these warranties in any manner
whatsoever. The time within which an action must
be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP
arising under the warranty or under any statute
or law of the United States or any state thereof is
hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date
you discover, or should have discovered, the
defect. This limitation does not apply to implied
warranties arising under state law.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL
RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER
RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE
U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW
LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

15-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD
COMBINATION

15LV505
OWNER’S MANUAL

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF
ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION
OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH
ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY
STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED,
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR
OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO
THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY
PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE
FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY
TO USE THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION).

Printed in Thailand

Dear Customer,

Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING
R I S K OF E LECTR IC S HOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

CHILD SAFETY:
It Makes A Difference How and Where You Use Your Flat
Panel Display

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your
new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:
The Issue
• The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend
and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However,
flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands
or installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Flat panel displays that are
inappropriately situated on dressers,
bookcases, shelves, desks,
speakers, chests or carts may fall
over and cause injury.

TOSHIBA Cares!

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,
do not use the polarized plug with an extension
cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades
can be inserted completely to prevent blade
exposure.
ENERGY STAR® qualified TV. Products that earn
the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas
emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency
guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of
Energy. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR
mark are registered U.S. marks.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention
to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper
grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of
cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information,
see item 26 on page 5.
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated
with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

2

• The consumer electronics industry
is committed to making home
entertainment enjoyable and safe.

Connections

14

Basic setup

20

TV operation

25

Basic playback

42

Advanced playback

45

Function setup

57

Others

62

©2008 Toshiba Corporation
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly.
*Screen size is approximate.

Model number:
Serial number:

FCC compliance information
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE
OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):
The Toshiba 15LV505 LCD TV/DVD Combination complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
Ph: (800) 631-3811 or visit TACP·s website at www.tacp.Toshiba.com
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user·s authority to operate this
equipment.

Tune Into Safety
• One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations
for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display.
• Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for
proper use of this product.
• Don’t allow children to climb on or play with furniture and
television sets.
• Don’t place flat panel displays on furniture
that can easily be used as steps, such
as a chest of drawers.
• Remember that children can
become excited while watching a
program, especially on a “larger
than life” flat panel display. Care
should be taken to place or install
the display where it cannot be
pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.
• Care should be taken to route all cords and
cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be
pulled or grabbed by curious children.

Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your
flat panel display, always:
• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display
manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such
as UL, CSA, ETL).
• Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount
manufacturers.
• If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your
flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional
installation.
• Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is
appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted
to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction. If you
are unsure, contact a professional
installer.
• A minimum of two people are
required for installation. Flat panel
displays can be heavy.

CAUTION:
THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ
THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR
FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE
MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE
LOCATION.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, NEVER
OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE
PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. NEVER STARE
INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

ON DISPOSAL
The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the
Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

3

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV or TV/DVD
Combination television.
This manual will help you use the many exciting features of
your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV or TV/DVD
Combination, please read this manual completely, and keep it
nearby for future reference.

4

Owner·s Record
The model number and serial number
are on the back of your TV/DVD.
Record these numbers in the spaces
below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you communicate with your
Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.

ColorStream is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

J51T0101A SH 08/08 N

Introduction

Introduction

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Continued)

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Installation, Care, and Service

Installation (cont. from previous page)

1)
2)
3)
4)

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.

Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and
heed all warnings when installing your TV:

Care (cont. from previous column)

5)

Do not use this apparatus near water.

6)

Clean only with dry cloth.

15) To avoid damage to this product, never place or
store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas;
or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

26) Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges (see
Section 810 of the National Electric Code.)

32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional
snap ping or popping sounds. This is normal,
especially when the unit is being turned on or off.
If these sounds become frequent or continuous,
unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba
Authorized Service Center.

7)

Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer·s instructions.

8)

Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wide blade or the third prong Wide plug
are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not ﬁt into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.

9)

10) Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table speciﬁed by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged
in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

Additional Safety Precautions

14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does
not operate normally, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power
cord to avoid possible electric shock or ﬁre.
• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with
any broken glass or liquid from the damaged
television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains
glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact
with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by
broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly with
water and consult your doctor.
• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect
the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.
14b) WARNING: To prevent the spread of ﬁre, keep
candles or other open ﬂames away from this product
at all times.

Antenna
lead-in wire

16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modiﬁcations
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user·s authority to
operate this equipment under the rules of the
Federal Communications Commission.
17)

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Never place
the TV on an unstable cart,
stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing
serious personal injury, death, or serious
damage to the TV.

Ground clamp
Electric service
equipment

20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing
liquid or place items such as vases, aquariums, any
other item ﬁlled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.
21) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV
cabinet back, bottom, and sides.
Never place the TV:
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;
• too close to drapes, curtains,
or walls; or
• in a conﬁned space such as
a bookcase, built-in cabinet,
or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from
overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.
Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.
22) Always place the back of the television at least four
(4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a
wall) to allow proper ventilation.
23) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord
is subject to wear or abuse.
24) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
25) Always operate the TV with a 120V AC, 60Hz power source only.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the
polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet
unless the blades can be inserted completely with three-wire
grounding type to prevent blade exposure.

Grounding conductors
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground clamps

Power service grounding
electrode system
(NEC Art 250 Part H)

27)

18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or
candles on top of the TV.
19) WARNING: Always place the TV on the ﬂoor or a
sturdy, level, stable Sturdy tie (as short as possible; min. 4 in.)
surface that can
Clip
support the weight
of the unit. To
Hooks
secure the TV, use a
Screw
sturdy strap from the
TV top
hooks on the rear
Band
of the TV pedestal TV side
to a wall stud, pillar
or other immovable structure. Make sure the strap is
tight, secure, and parallel to the ﬂoor.

Antenna discharge unit
(NEC Section 810-20)

33) Keep your ﬁngers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury.

Introduction

Important Safety Instructions

34) When you use headphones, keep the volume at a
moderate level. Using headphones continuously
at a high volume may cause hearing damage.
35) NEVER look directly into the disc slot or ventilation
slots at the source of the laser beam. Doing so
may cause sight damage.

DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
• Use extreme care to make sure you
are never in a position where your body
(or any item you are in contact with,
such as a ladder or screwdriver) can
accidentally touch overhead power lines.
Never locate the antenna near overhead
power lines or other electrical circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the following during
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,
wires, or any home theater component connected
to an antenna or phone system.

36) NEVER use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
Such discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury or product damage. SUCH DAMAGE
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY.
37) WARNING: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
• Never strike the screen with a sharp or heavy
object.
• Never touch, press, or place anything on the
LCD screen. These actions will damage the LCD
screen If you need to clean the LCD screen,
follow the instructions in item 28 on this page.

Service

Care

38)

For better performance and safer operation of your
TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
28) Always unplug the TV before cleaning.
Wipe the display panel
surface gently using only a
soft cloth (cotton, ﬂannel,
etc.) A hard cloth may
damage the surface of the
panel. Avoid contact with
alcohol, thinner, benzene,
acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive
cleaners, or chemical cloths, which may damage
the surface. Never spray volatile compounds such
as insecticide on the cabinet. Such products may
damage or discolor the cabinet.
29)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never spill liquids or push objects of
any kind into the TV cabinet slots.

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never attempt to service the TV
yourself.
Opening and removing the covers
may expose you to dangerous voltage or other
hazards. Failure to follow this WARNING may
result in death or serious injury.
Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service
Center.

39) If you have the TV serviced:
• Ask the service technician to use only replacement
parts speciﬁed by the manufacturer.
• Upon completion of service, ask the service
technician to perform routine safety checks to
determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.
40) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
ask a qualiﬁed service technician to properly
dispose of the TV.

30) While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting
cables or apparatus.
31) For added protection of your TV from lightning and
power surges, always unplug the power cord and
disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the
TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.

5

4

Introduction

Precautions

Notes on discs
Notes on moisture condensation
Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please
read the following carefully.
Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you
pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day and drops
of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same
way, moisture may condense on this unit·s internal optical
pick-up lens, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.

Observe the following safety precautions:
1) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can
support the weight of the TV.
2) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall, pillar, surface, or
other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this
manner, use the included strap located at the rear of
pedestal stand. (see item 19, page 4).

On handling discs

Notes on copyright

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in
ﬁgure below.

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

Playback side

le of mo
Examp ensat isture
ion!
cond

Important notes about your LCD TV
The following symptoms are technical limitations of
LCD Display technology and are not an indication of
malfunction; therefore, Toshiba is not responsible for
perceived defects resulting from these symptoms.
1) An after image (ghost) may appear on the screen
if a ﬁxed, non-moving image is displayed for a long
period of time. The after image is not permanent and
will disappear in a short period of time.
2) The LCD panel contained in this TV is manufactured
using an extremely high level of precision technology;
however, there may be an occasional pixel (dot of light)
that does not operate properly (does not light, remains
constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural property of
LCD technology, is not a sign of malfunction, and is
not covered under your warranty. Such pixels are
not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal
viewing distance.
Note: Interactive video games that involve shooting a
“gun” type of joystick at an on-screen target may not
work on this TV.

Optical pick-up
lens

Q Moisture condensation may occur in the following
situations:

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc
clean.

When you move the unit from a cold area to a warm area.
When you use the unit in a room in which the heat
was just turned on.
When you use the unit in an area where cold air from
an air conditioner directly hits the unit.
When you use the unit in a humid area.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

Using the unit when moisture condensation exists may
damage discs and internal parts. Connect the power
cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit,
remove the disc, and leave it for two or three hours.
After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up
and evaporated any moisture. Leaving the TV
connected to the wall outlet will help prevent moisture
condensation in the TV or DVD Player.

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and
the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and
Audio CDs are divided into tracks.
DVD video disc
DVD video disc
Title 1
Chapter 1

6

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Video CD/Audio CD
Video CD/Audio CD

Notes on locating the unit
Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR,
the playback picture may become poor and the sound
may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away
from the TV, radio, or VCR.
Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store
the TV/DVD in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or
areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

Title 2

Chapter 2

Wa
it!

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during
operation.
It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/DVD
or the disc.
For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback
of copyright message of the disc when the STOP (Q)
button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also
indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

Track 4

The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers,
which stand for their playable area, are printed on your
DVD video disc and you do not ﬁnd 1 or ALL , disc
playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case,
the unit will display a message on-screen.)
Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be
subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable.

On Video CDs

Structure of disc contents
Q Never use the unit when moisture condensation
may occur

About this owner·s manual
This owner·s manual explains the basic instructions of this
unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner
that allows speciﬁc or limited operation during playback. As
such, the unit may not respond to all operating command.
This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of
discs.

Notes on region numbers

On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidiﬁer.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.

Notes on handling
Q Do not subject the LCD panel to physical shock, such
as dropping it. It may cause unit damage and malfunction.
Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton
and packing materials come in handy. For fully
protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed
at the factory.
Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide, near
the unit.
Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with
the unit for prolonged periods of time.
Doing so will leave marks on the ﬁnish.
Q The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm
after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.
Q When the unit is not in use, always remove the disc
and turn off the power.

On cleaning discs

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision
of copyrighted materials including, without limitation,
television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited
under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC
(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of
Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations
depending on types of discs.
• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)
Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the same
way as a DVD.
• Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0)
In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with
the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive
software with search function by using the menu
displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of
the functions described in this owner·s manual may not
work with some discs.

Track 5

Wall outlet

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which
is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track
number” respectively.
There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

7

Introduction

Choosing a location for your LCD TV
Q To Display your LCD TV on the included Pedestal Stand:

Introduction

Notes on discs (Continued)

Contents

Playable discs
Disc Mark

Contents

Audio
+
Video
(moving
pictures)

DVD
video
discs

Video
CDs
DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio
CDs

Audio
+
Video
(moving
pictures)

Disc
Size

12 cm

8 cm

Maximum
playback time
Approx. 4 hours
(single sided disc)
Approx. 8 hours
(double sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes
(single sided disc)

12 cm

Approx. 74 minutes
(single sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes
(single sided disc)

Audio

Playing a disc ................................................. 42

Antenna connections ...................................... 14
Cable TV connections .................................... 15
Connecting to optional equipment .................. 16
Power source.................................................. 19

Approx. 160 minutes
(double sided disc)
Approx. 74 minutes
(single sided disc)

Basic playback

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS................................ 4
Precautions....................................................... 6
Notes on discs .................................................. 7
Contents ........................................................... 9
Identiﬁcation of controls ..................................10

Connections

Approx. 80 minutes
(single sided disc)

12 cm

Introduction

Basic setup
Auto setup ...................................................... 20
Setting the language....................................... 21
To memorize channels.................................... 22

The following discs are also available.
DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format
CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA or
JPEG format
Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format
Some of these discs may be incompatible.

TV operation
TV operation ................................................... 25
Labeling channels........................................... 27
Labeling video inputs ...................................... 28
Setting the V-Chip........................................... 29
Setting the closed captions............................. 33
CC advanced .................................................. 34
Adjusting the picture preference ..................... 35
Picture settings ............................................... 35
Viewing the wide-screen picture formats ........ 36
Film Mode ....................................................... 37
DNR ................................................................ 37
Sound control adjustment ............................... 38
Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) .... 38
Selecting the audio language ......................... 39
Using the aspect feature................................. 40
Adjusting the back lighting .............................. 40
Setting the Auto Shut Off ................................ 41
Resetting your settings ................................... 41

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CDROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even
if they may be labeled as above.
• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending
on the recording conditions.
• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot
play DVD video discs recorded in any other color
system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).
• This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a
disc adapter. It may cause trouble.
• Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into
the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.
You may not be able to remove it.
• Please do not use after market accessories, such as a
ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the
operation of the unit.

Advanced playback
Zooming.......................................................... 45
Locating desired scene................................... 45
Marking desired scenes.................................. 46
Repeat playback ............................................. 47
A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 47
Program playback........................................... 48
Random playback ........................................... 48
Changing angles..............................................49
Title selection ...................................................49
DVD menu .......................................................49
Changing soundtrack language .......................50
Subtitles ...........................................................50
Disc status .......................................................51
To turn off the PBC ..........................................51
MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation ......52
Repeat, random and program playback
using ﬁle browser.............................................55

Introduction

This unit can play the following discs.

Function setup
Customizing the function settings ....................57
Temporary cancel the rating level
by DVD disc .....................................................61

Others
Understanding the Power Return feature ........62
Troubleshooting ...............................................62
Reception disturbances ...................................64
Language code list ..........................................65
Speciﬁcations ..................................................66
Limited United States Warranty .......................67

Because of problems and errors that can occur during the
creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the
DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play
every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos.
If you happen to experience any difﬁculty playing a DVD
and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV,
please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.

9

8

Introduction

Identification of controls

Introduction

Front

Rear

AC INPUT
cover 19

Speaker

Remote sensor

Side

13

POWER indicator

20

Top

CH

25 / QSTOP button 42

MENU button 21 57
INPUT/ENTER button 16
POWER button 20

CH

25 /

PLAY button 42

VOLUME (+/–) buttons 25
EJECT button 43
AC INPUT 19

Antenna jack 14 15

Disc slot 42
COLORSTREAM HD IN jacks 17
VIDEO/GAME IN jack 16 17

10

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack 18 19
HEAD PHONE jack 26

11

Introduction

Identification of controls (Continued)

EJECT button 43
TV/DVD button 42

1

for details.

Open the battery compartment
cover in the direction of the
arrow.

2

Install two “R03/AAA” batteries
(supplied), paying attention to
the polarity indicated in the
battery compartment.

3

Replace the compartment
cover.

Introduction

Inserting batteries

Remote control
The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in

POWER button 20 42
SLEEP button 26

Direct channel selection
buttons (0-9) 25
Numbered buttons (0-9) 29
JUMP button 45
Direct channel selection button (

DISPLAY button 26 51
CH / button 25
SUBTITLE button 50

) 25

AUDIO SELECT button 50
VOL +/– button 25

INPUT button 16
ZOOM button 45
PLAY MODE button 47 48 51

Operation

MUTE button 26
*DVD MENU button 49

•
•

Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.
Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.

ENTER button 20
PLAY button 42

Direction buttons ( / / / ) 20

MENU button 21
SETUP button 57
PAUSE button
CH RTN button
SKIP ( ) button
REV button
FF button
SLOW ( ) button
TOP MENU button
RETURN button 53

EXIT/CANCEL button 20

43
26
44

STOP button 42
CLOSED CAPTION button 33
SKIP ( )button 44
SLOW ( ) button 44
MARKER button 46
ANGLE button 49

44
44
44
49
57

Approx. 5 meters

REPEAT A-B button 47
PIC SIZE button 36

GAME button 16

Caution:
• Never throw batteries into a ﬁre.
Note:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with
applicable laws and regulations.
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with
new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended
period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

SE-R0305

*DVD MENU button
Use the DVD MENU button to
display the menu included on
many DVD video discs.
To operate a menu, follow the
instructions in “DVD menu.” 49

13

12

Connections

Antenna connections

Cable TV connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system.
If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see 15 for Cable TV connections.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire)

Antenna
jack

300-75 ohm matching
transformer (not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching
transformer (not supplied)

For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler
box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the
Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

75 ohm
coaxial cable

For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires)

Antenna
jack

Antenna
jack

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination
VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back
of the TV/DVD.
If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300
ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching
transformer (not supplied).

75 ohm coaxial cable
(not supplied)

For subscribers to basic cable TV service

Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the
combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm
twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer
(not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner,
then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the
back of the TV/DVD.

If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the
incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect
the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections
shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4)
and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

Incoming 75 ohm
Cable TV

75 ohm cable to
TV/DVD

Converter/
descrambler

Antenna
jack

Combiner
(not supplied)
UHF 300 ohm
twin-lead wire
(not supplied)

VHF 300 ohm
twin-lead wire
(not supplied)

For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled
premium channels

Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires)
Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm
twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied).
Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back
of the TV/DVD.

Antenna
jack
VHF 75 ohm
(not supplied)
Combiner
(not supplied)

If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require
the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available
from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in
the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A”
position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the
converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.

Incoming
75 ohm
Cable TV

Converter/
descrambler

Splitter

A/B switch

A

75 ohm cable
to TV/DVD

Antenna
jack

B

UHF 300 ohm
twin-lead wire
(not supplied)

14

15

Connections

Antenna
jack

This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box.
Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for
normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment

0-3
CH /
INPUT

You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input.

GAME

Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output

Using the audio/video inputs
Source Selection
0.TV
1.Video
2.ColorStream HD
3.DVD

Press INPUT on the remote control to display the current signal source.
To change the input source, press INPUT again or press 0-2. (3 is for selection DVD
mode.)

If you connect a VCR with an S-Video cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must
also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN jacks as shown below. The S-Video cable only carries the video
signal. The audio signal is separated.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

: Signal ﬂow

Ex. VCR with S-Video

Connecting to a VCR
To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
(yellow)
VCR
: Signal ﬂow

Back side

To S-VIDEO IN
(white)

[0-3]:Select

Connections

Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV/DVD, such
as a VCR player. You can select TV, Video or ColorStream HD depending on which
input jacks you used to connect your devices.

(playback)
Back side

To Audio (L/R) OUT

(red) To VIDEO/GAME IN

To S-VIDEO OUT

(white)

S-Video cable (not supplied)

(red)

To AUDIO (L/R) IN

To VIDEO/GAME IN

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio cable (not supplied)

Note:
• When the S-Video cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes
precedence.

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Connecting to a camcorder

Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream® (Component video) output

To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
: Signal ﬂow
Camcorder

Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component
video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream® can greatly enhance picture
quality and performance.
Select the “ColorStream HD” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

Back side

(yellow)
(white)
(red)

To VIDEO/GAME IN

: Signal ﬂow

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Connecting to a TV Game

To COLORSTREAM HD
(Y, PB, PR) IN

To Component Video OUT

To Audio (L/R) OUT

Component video cable
(not supplied)

You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to the suitable brightness for your eyes.
1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD.
2. Select the Game mode by pressing GAME. The Game mode screen appears.
• If GAME is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen
appears on the screen.
Back side
(yellow)
: Signal ﬂow
To Audio/Video OUT

To VIDEO/GAME IN

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Note:
• You can also change the TV/DVD screen to the desired mode by pressing the CH / .
• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of
different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all
been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You·ll need to consult each component·s Owner·s Manual
for additional information.
• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this
TV/DVD.

(white)

Audio cable (not supplied)

(red)
To COLORSTREAM HD
AUDIO (L/R) IN

When using the Component video cable,
an Audio cable must be connected to
COLORSTREAM HD AUDIO(L/R) IN jacks.

(white)
(red)

Back side

Ex. DVD player with Component video

To Audio/Video OUT

Note:
• The ColorStream® (component video) inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i, 1080i interlaced signals and 480p, 720p progressive signals.
• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment
from the wall outlet before making any connections.
• If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the
unit away from the tuner and radio.

17

16

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)
You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the * This section uses the following reference mark.
TV/DVD to optional audio equipment.

: Center speaker
: Signal ﬂow

: Front speaker
: Rear speaker
: Sub woofer

Connecting to an ampliﬁer equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder

To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT

Connecting to an ampliﬁer equipped with a digital audio input
2 channel digital stereo
You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an ampliﬁer equipped with a digital audio input and speaker
system (right and left front speakers).
Note: PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback.
Back side
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT

Ampliﬁer equipped with a
Digital audio input
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

Connecting to an ampliﬁer equipped with a DTS® decoder
Digital Theater Systems (DTS)
DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full beneﬁt of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD
video discs or audio CDs.
Back side
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT

Ampliﬁer equipped with
a DTS decoder
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 &
other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS
and DTS Digital Out are
registered trademarks and the
DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

Note:
• DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.
This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack
of the TV/DVD.
• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet
before making any connections.
• The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver·s volume to a moderate listening level.
Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the ampliﬁer before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD·s power cord. If you leave the ampliﬁer·s power on, the speakers
may be damaged.

Power source
To use AC power source
1. Open the AC INPUT cover.
2. Connect the AC cord plug into this TV/DVD’s AC INPUT jack, then close the AC INPUT cover.
3. Connect the AC cord into an AC outlet.

AC Outlet
Wider Hole
and Blade

Connecting to an ampliﬁer equipped with an MPEG audio decoder
MPEG2 sound
You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic
realistic sound by connecting an ampliﬁer equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.
Back side
Ampliﬁer equipped with an
MPEG2 audio decoder
To COAXIAL
type digital
audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

18

To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT

AC 120V, 60Hz

AC cord (supplied)
Note:
• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.
• If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s
responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.
• If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet
and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.
• If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before pressing POWER.

19

Connections

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce
this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital
recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel ampliﬁer equipped with a Dolby
Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full beneﬁt of
Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the
Dolby Surround mark.
Back side
Ampliﬁer equipped with a
Dolby Digital decoder

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/
Power source

Basic setup

Auto Setup

Setting the language

POWER

The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily.
It leads you the Language selection, Air/Cable selection and Automatic
channel search.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system
connection is made!

MENU
ENTER
/ / /

ENTER
/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

EXIT/CANCEL

Auto Setup

Setting the language

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit
changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds
for a picture to appear on screen.

5

Now the “Automatic Search” starts.
Auto Setup
Language
Signal Type
Automatic Search

1

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit
changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds
for a picture to appear on screen.

2

Press MENU. The TV menu screen will
appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Setup”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.

English
Cable

4

Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language:
English, French (Français) or Spanish
(Español).

5

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Start

Basic setup

1

POWER

This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, French or
Spanish.
Select the language you prefer ﬁrst, then proceed with the other menu options.

Analog Channel Found : 0
Digtal Channel Found : 0

2

Auto Setup menu appears on the screen.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired language.

EXIT : End

• If you press EXIT/CANCEL, the Automatic
Search stops and changes to the TV screen.
• After the starting setup is completed, the TV
channel appears on the screen.

Auto Setup
Language
Signal Type
Automatic Search

English
Cable

Main Menu
Picture

Start

Audio

: Adjust

: Select

3

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

Note:
• The Auto Setup function will work only when you
press POWER for the first time.
• The process of “Automatic Search” may take 15 to
30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional
cable service.

Setup
: Select

3

Auto Setup
Language
Signal Type
Automatic Search

Channel
Lock

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”.
Setup

English
Cable

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
Reset

Start

: Adjust

: Select

ENTER:Set

4

16
Off
On
>>
: Adjust

: Select

Air
Cable

>>
English
>>

Note:
• If the unit does not operate properly, or No key
operation (by the unit and/or the remote control):
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s
operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once,
then connect it again.
• If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60
seconds, the MENU screen will return to normal
operation automatically.
• The TV section has its own menu and the DVD
section also has its own menu 57 .

- VHF/UHF channels
- Cable TV channels

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Setup
Language
Signal Type
Automatic Search

English
Cable
Start

: Select

ENTER:Set

21

20

Basic setup

To memorize channels
This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows
channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping
over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be
programmed into the TV/DVD·s memory. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna,
set the Signal Type option to the Air mode. When shipped from the factory, this
menu option is in the Cable mode.

ENTER

ENTER

/ / /

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Air/Cable selection

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu

Main Menu
Picture

Picture

Audio

Audio

Channel

Channel

You can select the channel that you want to skip.

1

Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you
want to skip.
Add/Delete
CH
2
3
3-001
3-002
4

Picture
Audio
Channel

Setup

Setup

4

Main Menu

Lock

Lock

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Signal
Analog
Analog
Digital
Digital
Analog

Add
Add
Delete
Add
Delete

Lock
: Select

2

: Select

ENTER:Set

Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

2

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Channel
Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

>>
>>
>>

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”.

>>

Cable
Start

3

Signal Type
Automatic Search

Air
Cable

22

: Select

Air
Start

Add/Delete
CH
2
3
3-001
3-002
4

Channel
Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

Cable
Stop

>>
>>
>>

: Select

3

Signal
Analog
Analog
Digital
Digital
Analog

Delete
Add
Delete
Add
Delete

: Adjust

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
Add/Delete
Adding Channel
Add/Delete
Clear All

: Adjust

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Add” or “Delete”,
whichever function you want to perform.

>>
>>
>>

6
7

Repeat steps 4 - 5 for other channels you
want to add or delete.
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Analog Channel Found : 0
Digital Channel Found : 0

Auto Ch Memory
Signal Type
Automatic Search

5

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Ch Memory

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

: Select
ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.

: Select

Signal Type
Automatic Search

5

2

>>
>>

: Select

Auto Ch Memory

4

Setup
: Select

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Channel

3

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Cancel
: Select

4

ENTER:Set

The TV/DVD will begin memorizing all the
channels available in your area.

- VHF/UHF channels
- Cable TV channels

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

23

Basic setup

1

Add/Delete channel

Automatic search

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

TV operation

Basic setup

To memorize channels (Continued)

POWER

TV operation

0–9, –

VOL +/–
CH /

ENTER
/

/

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Clear All

TV operation

All channels are deleted from the channel memory.

1

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.
(POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture
to appear on screen.)

TO SELECT ANALOG CHANNELS
1-9:
Press 1-9 as needed. Example, to
select channel 2, press 2.
10-99:
Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to
select channel 12, press 1, 2.
100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to
select channel 120, press 1, 2, 0.

2

Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL + or – .
The volume level will be indicated on the screen
by orange bars. As the volume level increases, so
do the number of bars. If the volume decreases,
the number of orange bars also decreases.

3

Set the Signal Type option to the appropriate
position (see “Air/Cable selection” 22 ).

TO SELECT DIGITAL CHANNELS
Press the first 3 digits, then press the – button,
followed by the remaining number.
Example, to select channel 015-001, press 0, 1,
5, –, 0, 0, 1.
• If a channel is selected with only audio content,
“Audio only” will be displayed on the screen.
• If a channel is selected with a weak digital
signal, “Digital channel signal strength is low”
will be displayed on the screen.
The same program may be available on either
an analog channel or a digital channel. You may
choose to watch either format.
• If a channel is selected to which you have not
subscribed, “Digital channel is encrypted” will
be displayed on the screen.

1
2

Tune in the new channel.

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Press MENU. The TV menu screen will appear.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Channel”, then press
϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu
Picture
Audio

Main Menu

Channel
Lock

Picture

Setup

Audio

: Select

Channel

ENTER:Set

Lock
Setup
: Select

3

ENTER:Set

2

Channel

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.

Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

Channel
Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.

>>
>>
>>

- VHF/UHF channels
- Cable TV channels

VHF/UHF/CABLE CHANNELS
: Select

: Select

Air
Cable

>>
>>
>>

ENTER:Set

3

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Clear All”, then press
϶ or ENTER.

4

Press the Direct Channel Selection (0-9, –)
buttons or CH / to select the channel.
(If you press only channel number, channel
selection will be delayed for a few seconds.)

Air
VHF
2-13
UHF
14-69

Add/Delete

4

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Adding Channel”,
then press ϶ or ENTER. The new channel will
be added into the channel memory.

Adding Channel
Add/Delete
Clear All

>>
>>
>>

Add/Delete
Adding Channel
Add/Delete
Clear All

: Select

5

TV operation

Adding Channel
If you find a new channel unregistered, you can add the
new channel into the channel memory.

>>
>>
>>

: Select

ENTER:Set

4

Cable
VHF
2-13
STD/HRC/IRC
14-36
(A) (W)
37-59
(AA) (WW)
60-85
(AAA) (ZZZ)
86-94
(86) (94)
95-99
(A-5) (A-1)
100-125 (100) (125)
01
(5A)

ENTER:Set

Note:
• If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound
will automatically be muted.
• It may take a few seconds for a digital channel picture
to appear on screen after being selected.

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

25

24

TV operation

SLEEP

TV operation (Continued)

Labeling channels
Channel label appear with the channel number display each time you turn on the
TV/DVD, select a channel, or press DISPLAY.
You can choose any four characters to identify a channel.

DISPLAY
VOL +/–
MUTE

ENTER
CH RTN

/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

TV operation (continued)

Labeling channels

Ϯ DISPLAY
Press DISPLAY to display the current information on the
screen.

CH-1
Digital

Air

Sleep Timer
Off
English

No Program Information is available

When the TV/DVD
receives a digital signal,
the digital information
will appear.
• Channel number
• Channel label (if preset)
• V-Chip rating
• Sleep timer
• Program guide
• Resolution

Natural
1080i

•
•
•
•
•

Station name
Broadcast program name
Signal type
Audio language
Picture size
Sleep Timer
Off

14
Analog

Cable

When the TV/DVD
receives a analog signal,
the analog information
will appear.
• Channel number
• Channel label (if preset)
• V-Chip rating
• Signal type
• Sleep timer
• Audio information (Stereo or SAP)
• Picture size
• Resolution

S l e e p Ti m e r
0h 10m

Ϯ HEAD PHONES
Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini
plug into the HEAD PHONE jack on the rear panel.
If you connect headphones, the sound from TV/DVD
speakers is muted.

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel” menu, then press ϶ or ENTER.

4

Ch Label
Channel Number
Ch Label
Label Clear

Main Menu
Picture

Note:
• After a few seconds, DISPLAY screen will return to
normal TV-operation automatically.
Ϯ CH RTN
This button allows you to go back to the last channel
selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to
return to the last channel you were watching.

Ϯ MUTE
Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s
sound will be silenced and “Mute” will appear on the
screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing
this button again or the VOL + or –.

26

15-1
A
>>

Audio
Channel
Lock
Setup

: Select

: Select

: Adjust

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Set

The characters rotation as follows:

2

-

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Ch Label”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The “Ch Label” menu will appear.

If the character which you desire appears, press
ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter the rest of the
characters.
If you would like a blank space in the label name,
you must choose the empty space from the list of
characters.

Channel
Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
Ch Label

>>
>>
>>

: Select

3

ENTER:Set

Press ϵ or ϶ to select a channel you want to
label, then press ϴ.

, () @ / + = -

SPACE

Natural
480i

Press DISPLAY again to clear the call display.

Press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until the character
you want appears in the first space.

TV operation

62-001 HDTV Moving Picture1

Ϯ SLEEP
To set the TV/DVD to
turn off after a preset
amount of time, press
SLEEP on the remote
control. The clock will
count up 10 minutes for
each press of the SLEEP button (Off, 0h 10m, 0h 20m,
..., 2h 0m). After the sleep time is programmed, the
display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind
you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the
sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining
time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the
sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display
turns to Off.

5

When you finish inputting the label name,
press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

6

Repeat steps 3-5 for other channel. You can
assign a label to each channel.

Ch Label
Channel Number
Ch Label
Label Clear

: Select

15-1
>>

: Adjust

To clear a Ch Label
After step 3 above, press ϳ or ϴ to select “Label Clear”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Note:
• The channel labels will be reset after “Automatic
Search” 22 .

27

TV operation

Labeling video inputs

Setting the V-Chip

The Video Label feature allows you to label each input source for your TV/DVD.

ENTER
/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Labeling video inputs

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

4

0–9

An age limitation can be set to restrict children from viewing or hearing
violent scenes or pictures that you may choose to exclude. The restriction
applies to “TV Rating” and “Movie Rating” if this data is transmitted. You may
set this restriction separately. To use the V-Chip function, you must register
a password.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired label for
that input source.

DISPLAY
ENTER

Notes:
If you forget the password, press DISPLAY four times within
ﬁve seconds while the TV is in password entering mode. This
allows you to reset your password.

/ /
MENU

To register a password

To change a password

1

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Video Label

Main Menu

SAT

Main Menu

Picture

Picture

Picture

Audio

Audio

Audio

Channel

Channel

Channel

Lock

Lock

Lock

Setup

Setup

: Adjust

: Select

Setup
: Select

: Select

2

ENTER:Set

: Select

–
VCR
DVD
DTV
SAT
CBL

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Video Label”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
Setup
Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

>>
English
>>
16

5

: Uses the default label name
: Video cassette recorder
: DVD video
: Digital TV set-top box
: Satellite box
: Cable box

2

Select and enter your password (4 digits)
using Number buttons (0-9), then press
ENTER.

New Password

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Change Password”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Change Password screen will appear.
Lock
V-Chip
V-Chip Set
V-Chip Set (DTV)
Update
Change Password

----

Off
>>
>>
>>
>>

>>

: Select

ENTER:Set
[0-9] : Select

3

2

Lock

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Set

Off
On

Reset

TV operation

Video
ColorStream HD

Main Menu

Press ϳ or ϴ to select an input which you
want to label.

3

Video Label

: Select

ENTER:Set

Enter the same password again to confirm,
then press ENTER.
The password is now registered.

3

ENTER: Set

Enter a new password using Number buttons
(0-9), then press ENTER.
Change Password

Video
ColorStream HD

-

Lock
Confirm Password

----

New Password

----

Confirm Password

----

: Adjust

: Select

[0-9] : Select
[0-9] : Select

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Set

Note:
• The V-Chip feature is available only for the U.S. V-Chip
system. The Canadian V-Chip system is not supported.

4

Enter the same password again to confirm,
then press ENTER.
The new password is now registered.

29

28

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)
0–9
MUTE
ENTER

ENTER

/

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

To set the V-Chip

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

4

Movie Rating

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The V-Chip Set Menu appears.

Movie Rating

Main Menu

V-Chip
V-Chip Set
V-Chip Set (DTV)
Update
Change Password

Picture
Audio
Channel

On
>>
>>
>>
>>

TV operation

G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X

Lock

Lock
: Select

Setup
: Select

2

: Select

ENTER:Set

Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your password, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.

5

Password

TV Rating
Movie Rating

: Select
ENTER:Set

: All ages
: Parental guidance
: Parental guidance less than 13 years old
: Under 17 years old parental guidance
suggested
NC-17 : 17 years old and above
X
: Adult only

V-Chip Set
>>
>>

----

[0-9] : Select

G
PG
PG-13
R

Press ϳ or ϴ to select which rating will be
used, then press ϶ or ENTER. Each rating
below will appear.

Lock

ENTER:Set

ENTER: Set

6

Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired rating, then
press ENTER.

7

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

ENTER: Set

TV Rating
TV Rating

3

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip”, then press
ϵ or ϶ to select “On” .
Lock
V-Chip
V-Chip Set
V-Chip Set (DTV)
Update
Change Password

: Select

30

On
>>
>>
>>
>>

: Adjust

ALL D

L

S

V

FV

TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
: Select

ENTER:Set

You can set the rating using age level and genre.
Age:
TV-Y
: All children
TV-Y7 : 7 years old and above
TV-G
: General audience
TV-PG : Parental guidance
TV-14 : 14 years old and above
TV-MA : 17 years old and above
Genre:
ALL
: All
D
: Dialogue
L
: Language
S
: Sex
V
: Violence
FV
: Fantasy Violence

To use the TV/DVD after it is protected.
When a program is received that is blocked by the VChip, press MUTE, then enter your password.
The protection will be temporarily overridden. If the TV/
DVD is turned off or the channel is changed, the V-Chip
restriction will be reactivated.
Note:
• The V-Chip function is activated only on programs and
input sources that include a rating signal.

31

TV operation

Setting the closed captions

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)
0–9

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your television will
be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes
available in the future.

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?
This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned
television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for
hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another
language.

ENTER
/

ENTER

/

/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU
CLOSED CAPTION

MENU

To download the additional V-Chip rating system (when available)

Setting the closed captions

1

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Audio
Channel
Lock
Setup
: Select

2

ENTER:Set

Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your password, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.
Lock
Password

----

Note:
• You can only download the additional V-Chip rating
system when your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal.
• When you download the additional rating system, it
may take some time for the download to occur.
• The V-Chip rating information and system are not
determined or controlled by the TV/DVD.
• The standard V-Chip rating system is available
whether your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal or
not, and will block both analog and digital programs.
To set the restriction level using the standard V-Chip
rating system, select “V-Chip Set” in step 3.
• The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving
technology, and availability, content, and format may
vary.
• You cannot select this feature if the TV/DVD is not
receiving a digital signal for the current station.

Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

3

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Analog Caption” or
“Digital Caption”, then press ϵ or ϶ to select
the desired Closed Caption mode.
When you select “Analog Caption”, you can
choose C1, C2, C3, C4, T1, T2, T3 and T4.

Main Menu
Picture

When you select “Digital Caption”, you can
choose from CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5 and CS6.

Audio
Channel
Lock

Closed Caption

Setup
: Select

2

CC Setting
CC Priority
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Closed Caption menu will appear.
Setup
Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
Reset

>>
English
>>

On
Digital CC
C1
CS1
Default
>>

: Adjust

: Select

5

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Priority”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “Digital CC” or “Analog
CC”.

16
Off
On
>>

: Select
[0-9] : Select

4

TV operation

Main Menu
Picture

6

You also need “Update” procedure to update
rating information.

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Set

3

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set (DTV)”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Lock
V-Chip
V-Chip Set
V-Chip Set (DTV)
Update
Change Password

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Setting”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “On”.
On: Captions will be displayed on the screen.
Off: Captions will not be displayed on the screen.
Closed Caption

On
>>
>>
>>
>>

: Select

Note:
• Depending on the broadcast signal, some
Analog Captions will function with a Digital
broadcast signal. This step prevent that two kind
of captions are overlapping.

CC Setting
CC Priority
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced

Off
Digital CC
C1
CS1
Default
>>

6

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

ENTER:Set
: Adjust

: Select

4

If the TV/DVD is not storing the additional
rating system, the TV/DVD will begin downloading it, which may take some time to be
completed.

5

Set your preferred content rating limits for the
additional rating system.

Note:

• You can also display the Closed Caption menu screen by pressing CLOSED CAPTION on the remote control.
• Digital caption feature is not available for analog channel.
Important Note:
If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set
“CC Setting” to “Off”.

33

32

TV operation

CC advanced

Adjusting the picture preference/
Picture settings

When you have selected Custom as the display method, you can adjust the
various setting listed below as follows:

You can select four picture modes—Sports, Standard, Movie and Memory—
as described in the following table:

This feature is designed to customize Digital Captions only.

Picture settings are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as
follows:

ENTER
/ / /

ENTER
/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

CC advanced

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

5

Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired item,
then press ϵ or ϶ to change the setting.

1

1
2

Auto

Text Type

Auto

Text Edge

Auto

Picture
Audio

Main Menu

Text Color

Auto

Channel

Text Opacity

Auto

Lock

Background Color

Auto

Channel

Setup

Background Opacity

Auto

Lock

You can select from among the following items
and parameters.
Text Size:
Auto, Small, Standard, Large
Text Type:
Auto, Style1, Style2, Style3,
Style4, Style5, Style6, Style7
Text Edge:
Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,
Uniform, Left Shadow, Right
Shadow
Text Color:
Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Text Opacity: Auto, Solid, Transparent,
Translucent, Flashing
Background Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,
Color:
Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Background Auto, Solid, Transparent,
Opacity:
Translucent, Flashing

Setup
>>
English
>>
16
Off
On

Reset

>>

: Select

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Digital CC Preset”,
then press ϵ or ϶ to select “Custom”.
Closed Caption
CC Setting
CC Priority
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced

: Select

On
Digital CC
C1

6

: Select

2

34

Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

: Adjust

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Preference”.

Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

: Select

3

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

: Select

• You cannnot select “CC Advanced” in the menu
before set “Digital CC preset” to “Custom”.
• You cannot set the Closed Caption “Text Color” and
“Background Color” as the same color.

Mode
Sports
Standard
Movie
Memory

On
Digital CC
C1

ENTER:Set

3

Picture Setting
25
Brightness
Contrast
50
Sharpness
25
Color
25
Tint
0
Color Temperature

: Adjust

: Select

ϵ
Brightness decrease
brightness
Contrast
decrease
contrast
Sharpness makes picture
softer
Color
be pale color
Tint
be reddish color

4

>>
Standard
>>
On
On

: Adjust

Picture Quality
Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set)
Standard picture quality (factory-set)
Movie-like picture setting (factory-set)
Your personal preferences (set by
you; see “Picture settings” at right).

After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen.

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to
adjust. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.

>>
Sports
>>
On
On

Picture
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

>>
Sports
>>
On
On

: Select

Press ϵ or ϶ to select a mode you want to
adjust.

Note:

CS1
Custom
>>

ENTER:Set

Picture

Closed Caption

: Select

Picture

Setup

CS1
Custom
>>

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Advanced”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The CC Advanced menu will appear.

CC Setting
CC Priority
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Setting”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The Picture Setting menu will appear.

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Closed Caption menu will appear.

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

: Adjust

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Color Temperature

Cool
Standard
Warm

4

: Adjust

Cool
ENTER:Set

϶
increase
brightness
increase
contrast
makes picture
clearer
be brilliant color
be greenish
color

Picture Quality
Bluish
Neutral
Reddish

After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen.

Note:
• The Contrast default setting is set to maximum at the
factory.

35

TV operation

Text Size

Audio

: Select

4

Picture settings

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

: Select

3

Adjusting the picture preference

CC Advanced

Main Menu

2

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

TV operation

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

Film Mode/DNR

0-4

You can view programs in a variety of picture sizes— Natural, Theather
Wide1, Theather Wide2, Theather Wide3 and Full.

A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film Mode to “On” when
you view a DVD.

MENU
ENTER
/ /

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) can reduce the roughness of the picture.
(This function is available only for analog broadcast.)

ENTER
/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

PIC SIZE

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Size”, then
press ϶ or ENTER to display Picture Size
menu. Press ϳ/ϴ or corresponding Number
button (0-4) to select the desired picture size,
as described below.

Theater Wide2 picture size (for letter box
programs)
The entire picture is uniformly enlarged—it is stretched
the same amount both wider and taller (retains its
original proportion).

Film Mode

DNR

1

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu

Main Menu
Picture
Picture

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Picture Size

TV operation

1
2

Press MENU. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.

Audio

Audio

Channel

Channel

Lock

Lock

Setup

Setup
: Select

0.Natural

: Select

1.Theater Wide1

ENTER:Set

ENTER:Set

ABCDEFG----------------

2.Theater Wide2
3.Theater Wide3

Theater Wide3 picture size (for letter box programs
with subtitles)
To fill the width of the screen, it is extended horizontally.
However; it is only slightly extended at the top and the
bottom.

4.Full

[0-4]:Select

Note:
• Selectable picture sizes may vary depending on the
input source or broadcast signal.
• Picture Size menu also can be displayed by pressing
PIC SIZE on the remote control.

3

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DNR”.

Picture
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

ABCDEFG----------------

2

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Film Mode”.

Picture

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

>>
Sports
>>
On
On

In some cases, this image will display the size of
standard 4:3 with a black side bar.

: Adjust

: Select

3

3

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Picture

Picture

Theater Wide1 picture size (for 4:3 format
programs)
To fill the screen, the right and left edges are extended,
however; the center of the picture remains near its
former ratio.
The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

Note:
• Some High Definition and/or Digital broadcasts may
not allow you to change the picture size.
• In 720p or 1080i signal, only the Theater Wide2 and
Full picture size features are available.

Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
Film Mode
DNR

>>
Sports
>>
Off
On

: Select

>>
Sports
>>
On
Off

: Adjust

: Adjust

: Select

4

>>
Sports
>>
On
On

: Adjust

: Select
ABCDEFG--------------------------

Full picture size (for 16:9 source programs)
Full will display the picture at the maximum size.

Natural picture size

2

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Note:
• A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film
Mode to “On” when you view a DVD from the DVD player
connected with ColorStream (component video) inputs.

37

36

TV operation

Sound control adjustment/
Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP)

Selecting the audio language

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu

1

ENTER
/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Selecting the audio language

Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Audio”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Audio

Lock
Setup

Setup

ENTER:Set

: Select

ENTER:Set
[0-6]: Select

: Select

2

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “MTS”, then press ϵ or
϶ to select “Stereo”.

2

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Audio Language”,
then press ϶ or ENTER to display the Audio
Language menu.

4

After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen.

Audio

Audio
Bass
15
15
Treble
Balance
0
MTS
Audio Language

Audio
Bass
15
15
Treble
Balance
0
MTS
Audio Language

Stereo
English

Stereo
English

: Adjust
: Select

Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the bass sound.
Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the treble
sound.
Balance: Press ϵ or ϶ to obtain an equal sound
level from both speakers.
Bass:
Treble:

3

0. English
1. Language 1
2. Language 2
3. French
4. Language 3
5. Spanish
6. No Info

Channel

Lock

Setup

Press ϳ/ϴ or Number buttons (0-6) to select
your desired language.
Audio Language

Picture
Audio

Channel

Lock

Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to
adjust. Then press ϵ or ϶ to adjust each
setting.

3

TV operation

Picture

Channel

: Select

Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu

Audio

: Select

2

1

Main Menu

Picture

0-6

ENTER
/ / /

Selecting Stereo/Second
Audio Program (SAP)

Sound control adjustment

When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can
select one of the audio language. (This function is available only for digital
broadcast.)

DISPLAY

The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature provides high-fidelity stereo sound.
MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second
language or other audio information.
When the TV/DVD receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word “Stereo” or
“SAP” displays on-screen every time you press DISPLAY.

After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen.

3

: Adjust

Bass
15
15
Treble
0
Balance
MTS
Audio Language

: Select

Stereo
English

ENTER:Set

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Note:
• Generally you can leave your TV in stereo mode
because the TV automatically outputs the type of
sound being broadcast (stereo or mono).
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select “Mono” to reduce
the noise.
To listen to a second audio program (SAP)
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “SAP” in step 2 above. The TV
speakers will output the second audio program instead
of normal audio.

38

39

TV operation

Setting the Auto Shut Off/
Resetting your settings

Using the aspect feature/
Adjusting the back lighting

If the Auto Shut Off feature is On, a station being viewed stops broadcasting
and the TV is not operated, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15
minutes.

When the Aspect feature is set to On and the TV receives a 480i signal, the
picture size is automatically selected (as described in the following table).

ENTER
/ / /

The Backlight feature adjusts the screen brightness for improved picture
clarity.

ENTER
/ / /

The Reset function returns your settings to the factory settings.

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Using the aspect feature

Adjusting the back lighting

Setting the Auto Shut Off

Resetting your settings

1

1

1

1

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu
Picture
Audio

Channel

Channel

Lock

Lock

Setup

Setup

: Select

ENTER:Set

: Select

Picture

Picture

Audio

Audio

Channel

Channel

Lock

Lock

Setup

Setup

ENTER:Set
: Select

2

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Aspect”.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

2
>>
English
>>
Off
On
>>

: Select

16
Off
On

Reset

>>

: Select

3

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

>>
English
>>

Reset

: Adjust

After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen.

2

: Select

: Adjust

Setup

3

Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

>>
English
>>
16
Off
On

Reset
: Select

>>
: Adjust

After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen.

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Reset”.

Setup

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

16

Reset

: Select

ENTER:Set

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Shut Off”.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Setup

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect

3

2

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Backlight”.

Setup

TV operation

Main Menu

Main Menu
Picture
Audio

>>
English
>>
16
Off
On
>>
ENTER:Set

3

Press ϶ or ENTER to return your settings to
the factory settings.

4

“Reset” will appear on the screen approx. 3
seconds, then it returns to the normal

Setup

Aspect ratio of signal
source

Automatic aspect size
(When Aspect is On)

4:3 Normal

Natural

16:9 Full

Full

4:3 Letter box

Theater Wide2

Not deﬁned

User-set mode

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
Reset

Off
On
>>

: Select

4

>>
English
>>
8

Note:
• The Reset function returns your adjustments to the
following factory settings:

: Adjust

After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen.

Picture Setting
Brightness ...... center (25)
Contrast ............ max (50)
Sharpness...... center (25)
Color .............. center (25)
Tint ................... center (0)
Color Temperature ... Cool
Picture Preference .... Sports
Film Mode .......................On

Bass................... center (15)
Treble ................ center (15)
Balance................ center (0)

41

40

Basic playback
TV/DVD
POWER

Playing a disc

PLAY

This section shows you the basics on how
to play a disc.

STOP
POWER

To obtain a higher quality picture

VOLUME +/–

VOL +/–

EJECT

CAUTION
Keep your ﬁngers well clear of the disc slot when
disc is loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so
may cause serious personal injury.
DVD
VCD
CD

ENTER
/

/ /

PLAY
STOP

Basic playback

Preparations:
• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off.

1

3

Load a disc in the disc slot.

• Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc
without touching either of its surfaces, align it with
the guides, and place it in position.
• If a disc is inserted during some modes other than
DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then
playback may be begun automatically.

42

About

4

On the TV screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and
then playback commences.

DVD

VCD

CD

The DVD VCD CD icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the
function described under that heading.
: You can use this function with DVD video discs.
VCD : You can use this function with Video CDs.
CD : You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.
DVD
VCD
CD

PLAY
STOP
PAUSE

Basic playback (continued)

To pause playback (still mode)

To remove the disc

Press PAUSE during playback.

Press EJECT.

Reading

To resume normal playback,
press PLAY.

Remove the disc after the disc comes
out.

• The sound is muted during still
mode.
A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the
disc has a menu feature.
/ or / on the remote control to
Press
select title, then press ENTER. Title is selected and
play commences.

Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD
mode.
The DVD startup screen will appear on the TV screen.

Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a
DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a
lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the Sharpness with the Picture
Setting menu 35 .

5

Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.

6

Press STOP to end playback.

Volume : 25

QResuming facility
• The unit records the stopped
point, depending on the disc.
“ ” appears on the screen.
Press PLAY to resume playback
(from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again
(“Q” appears on the TV screen.),
the unit will clear the stopped
point.

Basic playback

2

Press POWER on the unit or on the remote control to turn on the unit.
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to
appear on screen.
• Every time you press POWER, the TV/DVD starts
from TV mode.
• When using an ampliﬁer, switch on the ampliﬁer.

EJECT
POWER

To stop playback
Press STOP.

Note:
• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen
according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again 7 60 .
• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few
minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC 51 .
• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally ﬁxed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according
to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the
instructions supplied with the DVDs.
• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.
• Use the EJECT to unload and eject the disc.
• Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.
• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen
menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press
POWER on the remote control once the movie is completed.
• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

Q To start playback in the stop mode
Press PLAY.

Note:
If the unit does not operate properly:
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD·s operation. In such
case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.

43

Advanced playback

Basic playback

Playing a disc (Continued)

Zooming/Locating desired scene

SLOW

DVD
VCD
CD

DVD
VCD
CD

Press REV or FF during playback.

To resume normal playback

1

Press PLAY.

REV: Fast reverse playback
FF: Fast forward playback
Each time you press REV or FF
button, the playback speed changes.

DVD
VCD
CD

Zooming
Press ZOOM during playback.
The center part of the image will be
zoomed in.
Each press of ZOOM will change
the ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5)
and 3 (x 2.0).

Note:
• The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan
of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs.
• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

1

DVD
VCD

Playing frame by frame

Each time you press the button, the
slow-motion speed changes.

DVD
VCD
CD

or

2

Press
or
to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter” or “Time”.
Jump

2

Press
frame.

/ / /

to view a different part of the

You may move the frame from
the center position to UP, DOWN,
LEFT or RIGHT direction.

3

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.
Jump
Title
Chapter
Time

To resume normal playback

12

Press PLAY.

Note:
• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.
• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.

Locating a chapter or track

Press SKIP

Jump
Title
Chapter
Time

Title
Chapter
Time

Playing in slow-motion
(FORWARD)

Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

To resume normal playback

Note:
• The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

Press SLOW (REVERSE) or
during playback.

Locating desired scene

Press PLAY.

Each time you press PAUSE, the
picture advances one frame.

DVD
VCD

1

/ / /
ENTER
EXIT/CANCEL

Advanced playback

Press PAUSE during still playback.

JUMP
DISPLAY
ZOOM

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the
desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and
track are used to locate the desired point to playback.
To check the title/track, chapter/track and time, press DISPLAY.

/

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

0–9

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make
selections by switching the position of the frame.

PAUSE
PLAY
SKIP
/
REV
/ FF

3

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to
return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

Note:
• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the
zoom mode.
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
Playback starts from the beginning of
the current chapter or track.
When you press twice in quick successions,
playback starts from the beginning of
the preceding chapter or track.

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.
• Refer to the package supplied with
the disc to check the numbers.

4

Press ENTER. Playback starts.
• When you change the title,
playback starts from Chapter 1 of
the selected title.
• Some discs may not work in the
above operation.

Note:
• In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time
can be selected.
• In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does
not work. To turn off PBC, see page 51 .

Note:
• A “Prohibition” symbol “” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not
available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the
TV/DVD.

45

44

Advanced playback

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

Marking desired scenes

PLAY MODE
ENTER

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.
You can resume playback from each scene.

ENTER
/

PLAY
SKIP

EXIT/CANCEL

/

REPEAT A-B

MARKER
DVD
VCD

Marking the scenes

1

Press MARKER during playback.

2

Select the blank Marker using
or .
Then press ENTER to mark the desired scene.

DVD
VCD

Returning to the scenes

1

Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

2

Press

DVD
VCD

DVD
VCD
CD

Repeat playback

1

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop
mode.

2

[DVD]
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter”
or “Title”.
The unit automatically starts
repeat playback after ﬁnishing
the current title or chapter.

A-B Repeat playback

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between
two selected points.

1

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.
The start point is selected.
A

or

to select the Marker 1-3.

• Repeat this procedure to mark the
other 2 scenes.

3

Press MARKER to clear the display.

3

: Off

Press REPEAT A-B again.
The end point is selected. Playback
starts at the point that you selected.
Playback stops at the end point and
returns to Point A automatically, then
starts again.

[Video CD]
to select “Repeat”.
Press
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or
“All”.

Press ENTER.
Playback starts from the marked
scene.

A B

The unit automatically starts
repeat playback after ﬁnishing
the current track.

Note:
Q To cancel the Marker
• Some discs may not work with the marking operation.
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press EXIT/CANCEL.
• The marking is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the
power off.
• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to
appear.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.

Play Mode
Mode

: Off

Repeat

: Off

• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,
press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

3

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is
prohibited during playback.
• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP
or
is pressed.

46

2

To resume normal playback
Press REPEAT A-B again.
“

Off ” appears on the screen.

Note:
• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations
may not be displayed.
• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include
multiple angles.
• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback
is activated.
• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain
scenes of the DVD.
• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and
MP3/WMA/JPEG CD.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

47

Advanced playback

Play Mode
Repeat

Advanced playback

Changing angles/Title selection/
DVD menu

Program playback/Random playback
0–9

You can arrange the playback order of tracks on the disc. And the
unit can also select tracks at random and playback them. These
features work for Video CD.
For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback
(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 55 and “Program playback (Audio
CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 56 .

VCD
VCD

1

4

Play Mode
Mode

: Off

Repeat

: Off

1
2
3

–––
–––
–––

TOP MENU

ANGLE

Press / to return to the left column, then
press / to select the “Program Playback”
and press ENTER.

: Off

1

Press ANGLE during playback.
The current angle will appear.

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle
is selected.

1/2

Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the
angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Play Mode
Mode
–––
–––
–––

: Program

Repeat

: Off

Program Playback

1
2
3

9
3
11

Title selection
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

Press / to select the programming position.
Press / and then use Number buttons (0–9)
to input the track.
• To program others, repeat this step.
• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.

Play Mode
Mode

: Program

Repeat

: Off

Program Playback

1
2
3

9
–––
–––

Q To change the program
1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press / / /
to select the track number you want to change, then
press EXIT/CANCEL.
2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the new track
number.
Q To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press / / / to select the
track number. Then press EXIT/CANCEL.
Q To clear all the programs
At the left column, press / to select “Clear Program”.
Then press ENTER.
Note:
• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set
Program playback.
• The program is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the
power off.

1

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop
mode.

2

Press / to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.

3

: Random
: Off

Program Playback

1
2
3

–––
–––
–––

48

Press PLAY.
The Random Playback will start.
• If you set “Random” during playback mode,
Random playback will begin after the track that is
currently being played has ended.
• To resume normal playback,
select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Play Mode
Repeat

Press TOP MENU during playback.
Title menu appears on the screen.

Press

/

/

/

3

Press ENTER or PLAY.
The playback of the selected title will
start.

to select the desired title.

Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.
• Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a
“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.
When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.

Random playback

Mode

1
2

Advanced playback

1
2
3

2

• To resume normal playback,
select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Play Mode
: Program

Program Playback

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

Press or to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.

Repeat

CD
VCD

/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
PLAY

Changing angles

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Mode

3

DVD MENU
/ / /
ENTER
PLAY

Program playback

Program Playback

2

PLAY MODE
ENTER

1

Press DVD MENU during playback.

2

Press

The DVD menu appears on the TV
screen.
• Press DVD MENU again to resume
playback at the scene when you
pressed DVD MENU.
/

/

/

to select the desired item.

3

Press ENTER.
The menu continues to another
screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set
the item completely.

Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume
playback from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.

Note:
• In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random
function during playback.
• The random playback is canceled when you eject the disc or
turn the power off.

49

Advanced playback

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles

AUDIO SELECT
SUBTITLE

Disc status/To turn off the PBC
DISPLAY
PLAY MODE
/

ENTER
DVD
VCD

Changing soundtrack language

DVD
VCD

Subtitles

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc. When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can
select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

1

Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.
The current soundtrack language will
appear.

1

Disc status

VCD

1
2

Press / to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.

DVD

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until
the desired language is selected.

ELAPSED
TIME

DISC OPERATION

Play Mode

TOTAL
TIME

Mode

: Off

Repeat

Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the
desired language is selected.

2

To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until
“Off” appears.

TITLE NO.

Off

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

DVD
Title 1/3
1/1 Eng Dolby Digital
1/1

ANGLE NO.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few
seconds.
In case of Video CD playback
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO
SELECT.
LR

L

R

• The on screen display will disappear after a
few seconds.
Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change
subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.
• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when
you loaded or eject the disc.
• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not
be changed immediately.

: Off

Program Playback

00:15:25 01:41:39
Chapter 2/24
1/2 Eng

–––
–––
–––

CHAPTER
NO.

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

1
2
3

3

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

A KIND OF AUDIO

Q To turn on the PBC
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly
until “PBC” appear.

Video CD
DISC OPERATION

VCD
Track 3/15

ELAPSED
TIME

TOTAL
TIME

00:08:32 00:51:03

Note:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the
button several times, the language is not recorded on
the disc.
• The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when
you eject the disc. The initial default language or
available language will be heard if the disc is played
back again.
• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no
sound will be heard from the TV/DVD·s speakers.

50

TRACK NO.

51

Advanced playback

2

(see 7 )

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

1/5 Eng

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

To turn off the PBC

With press of DISPLAY, the status of the disc
will appear on the screen.
To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation
/ / /
ENTER
STOP
PLAY

This unit can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/
WMA/JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied).
The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.
This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA ﬁles). Not all recordable
discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner·s manual are meant only as a
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 ﬁles is not recommended.
You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content.
Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

CD

Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information

CD

1
2

MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback
Load an Audio CD or a disc on which MP3
or WMA ﬁles have been recorded in the disc
slot.
A ﬁle browser screen will appear on the screen.

CAUTION:
• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁles cannot be played back.
Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate:
MP3 CD
MPEG-1 Audio
32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)
The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant
bit rate.
WMA CD
WMA version 7 and 8
32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps
The ﬁle recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

3/15 00:00:00
/WMA-11.WMA

MP3-5
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA-2
WMA-3

Select Files
Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

Select Files

MP3-6

Repeat

:Off

WMA-11

Mode

:Off

WMA-12
Picture-1

JPEG Preview

Picture-2

Music Playing

Picture-3

3

Press

/

Picture-4

to select ﬁle.
/MP3-2.MP3
Select Files

Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA-2
WMA-3

Limitations on display
• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.
Available letters for display are the following:
capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).
• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁles
To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order,
1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.
2. Name each ﬁle including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).
3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

About ﬁle menu

Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

JPEG Preview

• In case the current directory includes more than 8
ﬁles, press or to scroll in the ﬁle list.
• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then
press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, press
RETURN or select “ Go Up ...” then press ENTER.
• When PLAY is pressed after the ﬁle browser
displayed, playback begins automatically starting
from the ﬁrst ﬁle. In this case, if the ﬁrst ﬁle is an
MP3/WMA ﬁle, only MP3/WMA ﬁles are played
back in order. If the ﬁrst ﬁle is a JPEG ﬁle, the ﬁrst
JPEG ﬁle is played back. If there is no ﬁle at a root
directory, playback does not begin automatically.

4

Press ENTER.
The selected ﬁle starts playing back.

5

Press STOP to end playback.

Note:
• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA
and JPEG ﬁles, the ﬁles are played back by selecting
them from the ﬁle browser.
• MP3 or WMA ﬁle on the Kodak Picture CD is not
recognized on this unit.

Advanced playback

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its ﬁle name must include 3-digits extension letters,
“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized ﬁles.
• This unit can read 2000 ﬁles per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 ﬁles, it reads up to 2000 ﬁles, the remaining ﬁles
will be omitted.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.
• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁles, only audio tracks will be played.
• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁles depending on its structure.
• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Speciﬁcation” can be played back, the ﬁle name is displayed (within 15 letters) on
the screen. Long ﬁle names will be condensed.
• The music ﬁles recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

RETURN

Note:
• During MP3/WMA playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
Repeat functions.
• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and
Program playback for Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG playback
55 56 .

QSelect Files
The ﬁle type to make it display in the ﬁle browser can
be chosen.
1.Press or to highlight “Select Files” at right column
in the ﬁle browser.
2. Press ENTER, then press or to select ﬁle type
from the list (Music or Picture).
3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked
ﬁle type will be displayed in the ﬁle browser.
4. Press RETURN to save the setting.

• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears
on the TV screen. Press PLAY to resume playback
(from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit
will clear the stopped point.

53

52

Advanced playback

ZOOM
DVD MENU

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD
operation (Continued)

CD

1
2
3

JPEG playback

CD

Preparation:
• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds”
or “15 Seconds” 59 .

/Picture-01.JPG

Picture-01
Picture-02
Picture-03
Picture-04
Picture-05
Picture-06
Picture-07
Picture-08

Slide show playback

The slide show enables you to view pictures (ﬁles) one after
another automatically.

Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.

A ﬁle browser screen
will appear on the
screen.

ENTER
/ / /
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
SKIP
ANGLE
TOP MENU

Repeat, random and program playback
using file browser
/ / /
ENTER
PLAY
SKIP

CD

1

Repeat playback (Audio CD/
MP3/WMA/JPEG)
In the ﬁle browser, press / /
“Repeat” during stop mode.

/

to select

CD

1

/

Random playback (Audio CD/
MP3/WMA/JPEG)
In the ﬁle browser, press /
“Mode” during stop mode.

/

/

to select

Select Files
Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

JPEG Preview
W: 2048 H: 1536

Select your desired starting ﬁle for the slide
show in the step 3 on left.

Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3

Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from
the selected ﬁle.

2

Select Files
Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or
“All”.

Select Files

Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3

2

Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

• If you press PAUSE during the slide show, the slide

• When PLAY is pressed after the ﬁle browser
displayed, playback begins automatically
starting from the ﬁrst ﬁle. In this case, if the
ﬁrst ﬁle is a JPEG ﬁle, the ﬁrst JPEG ﬁle is
played back. If the ﬁrst ﬁle is an MP3/WMA
ﬁle, only MP3/WMA ﬁles are played back in
order. If there is no ﬁle at a root directory,
playback does not begin automatically.

4

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture
appears on the screen.

Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees.
Press ANGLE during playback of the image.

show stops temporary. “\\” appears brieﬂy on the TV
screen.
Press PLAY or SKIP
again to resume the slide show.
• If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press
ANGLE repeatedly until it·s right side up.
“

”, “

”, “

” or “

” appears on the TV screen.

• When the slide show playback ﬁnished, the ﬁle list

appears.
• To stop the slide show, press STOP. The ﬁle browser
appears.
Note:
• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
Repeat functions.
• When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire
image may not be displayed on a screen, preview window
or thumbnail list.
• It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.

3

MP3-2

Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2

MP3 3

MP3-3

Select Files

Folder-1
Folder-2

Repeat

:Track

MP3-1

Mode

:Off

Press PLAY.
The unit automatically starts repeat
playback after ﬁnishing the current
track.

To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
• The repeat function is canceled when you eject the disc
or turn the power off.
or
• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP
is pressed.

3

Select Files
Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Random

Press PLAY.
The random playback will start.

To resume normal playback
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.
Note:
• The random function is canceled when you eject the disc
or turn the power off.

“
”, “ ”, “
” or “ ” appears on the screen.
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG
ﬁles. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” 45 ).

5
54

Press STOP to end playback.
The ﬁle browser appears on the
screen. If you want to watch the
other ﬁle, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

55

Advanced playback

Press / to select the ﬁle.
To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.
Press / / / to select the desired ﬁle.
(To return to the ﬁle browser, press TOP MENU.)

1
2

Advanced playback

Function setup

Repeat, random and program playback
using file browser (Continued)

TV/DVD

Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize
performance to your preference.
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.

/ / /
ENTER

/ / /
ENTER
SETUP

PLAY

RETURN
CD

1

DVD
VCD
CD

Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)
In the ﬁle browser, press / / /
“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

to select

4

Press / to select “Program View”, then press
ENTER. Program View shows only the
programmed ﬁles that you have added in step 2.

1

Setting procedure

Press SETUP during stop mode.
The following on-screen display appears.

4

Then press or ENTER. The selectable
settings will appear.
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV
Screen

Folder-1
Folder-2

Repeat

:Off

Mode

:Off

MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3 3

MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-3

Edit Mode

Clear Program

Output
Display
Audio

JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
Pi t

Program View

2

Press
press

: English
Interlace
On
M
Di dX(R) VOD
A t

or to select the desired section, then
or .
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV
Screen

:Off

Mode

:Off

Edit Mode

Browser View

3

Press / / / to select “Add To Program”.
Then press ENTER. All marked ﬁles are added
into the program list.
Folder-1
Folder-2

Edit Mode
Program View

MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3

Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA-2
WMA-3

• Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to

Edit Mode
Program View

change other option.

Add To Program

• To select another section, go
JPEG Preview

3

First option will be highlighted. Press
to select the desired option.
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV
Screen

Add To Program

5

In the Program View, press PLAY. The ﬁles
start to playback in programed order that were
added by you.

To remove ﬁle from program list in stop mode
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select ﬁle
you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear
Program” and press ENTER. Marked ﬁle is removed
from program list.

Output Mode
Audio
Picture

back to step 2 by pressing
repeatedly.

or

: Off
English
16:9

QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display
: English
On

JPEG Preview

Press ENTER. Selected ﬁle
was marked.
Repeat this procedure to
select the other ﬁles.

Change the selection using or , by referring
to the corresponding pages 57 ~ 60 .
Press ENTER to save the setting.

: Auto
English
Interlace

JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off

6

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP once or
press RETURN repeatedly.

Function setup

Repeat

: Auto
English
Interlace

5

JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off

Press / / / to select ﬁle you want to
add into the program list.
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
MP3-3
WMA-1
WMA 2

: Off
English
16:9

QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display
: English
On
Output Mode
Audio
Picture

2

: 4:3
Off
English
4:3
QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display
: English
On
16:9
Output Mode : Auto
Audio
Picture
Interlace
English

: English
Off

QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: English
On
4:3

JPEG Preview

When “Edit Mode” is black
color, you can mark the ﬁles
which you want to add into
Program list.

Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu

Edit Mode
Browser View

Setting details
Section

Option

Note:
• The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc
or turn the power off.

Details

Page

Menu Subtitle
Audio

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio”
if more than one language are available on the disc.

TV Screen

To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.

Display

To turn On or Off the operational status display on the TV screen.

Picture Mode

To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.

JPEG Interval

To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.

Night Mode

To select On or Off for Night Mode.

Digital Out

To select a digital output sound format corresponding to your
system connection.

Parental

To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.

Password

To change the password.

58

WMA-1
WMA 2

JPEG Preview

When you ﬁnish storing the ﬁles
which you want into the Program
list, select “Edit Mode” and press
ENTER to release edit mode.

59

60

57

56

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details
Picture Mode
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu

: Off
English

Parental
DRC
Menu
TV
Screen

QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display
: English
On

Output
Display
Audio

Output Mode
Audio
Picture

: On
Interlace
English

Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto
JPEG Interval

: 5 Seconds

Screen Saver

: On

Parental
Menu
E.B.L.
Night
Mode

: Off
16:9
English

QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On

: Auto
Interlace
English

JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off

Auto:
Menu, Subtitle, Audio
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and
“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto
the disc.
English, Francais, Espanol:
The selected language will be heard or seen.

Original (Audio):
The unit will select the ﬁrst priority language of
each disc.
Off (Subtitle):
Subtitles do not appear.
Note:
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the
ﬁrst-priority language is selected.
• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform
it by “Language” in the TV menu 21 .

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:
(Letter box):
4:3
When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it
displays the wide picture with black bands at the
top and bottom of screen.
(Pan & scan):
4:3
It displays the wide picture on the whole screen
with left and right edges automatically cut off.
16:9
(Wide):
A wide screen picture is displayed full size.
Note:
• If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it
will display 4:3 style.

Display
On screen display can be switched on or off when you
press any buttons.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you
press any buttons.
On: On screen displays appear when you press
the buttons (factory setting).

Film:

Select this selection normally.
The DVD player automatically detects
source content, ﬁlm or video of
playback source, and converts that
signal in an appropriate method.
The DVD player converts ﬁlm content
pictures appropriately. Suitable for
playback of ﬁlm content pictures.

Video: The DVD player ﬁlters video signal and
converts it appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content
pictures.
Note:
• Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or
doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

JPEG Interval
You can continuously playback all JPEG ﬁles
automatically.
After the selection below, the disc will start playback on
JPEG ﬁles which have been recorded.
Off:
Plays back one ﬁle at a time.
5 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
5 second intervals.

Output
Audio
Display

: Interlace
On
English

Picture Mode
DivX(R) VOD
: Auto
JPEG Interval

: 5 Seconds

Screen Saver

: On

Ϯ Night Mode
Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as
to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc.
On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down
slightly when played back. This is suitable when
it is connected to a stereo.
Note:
• This function works only when the disc recorded with
Dolby Digital is played back.
• The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD
video disc.

Ϯ Digital Out
You can select the digital output sound format corresponding
to your system connection.
Off:
There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
jack.
PCM:
Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo
amplifier.
Bitstream:
Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Note:
• Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output
in PCM format.

10 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
10 second intervals.
15 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
15 second intervals.

58

59

Function setup

Other:
Other language can be selected (see “Language
code list” 65 ).

TV Screen

: Off
English

Subtitle
TV
Digital
Screen
Out
Set Password
: English
4:3
Bitstream

There are two types of source content in pictures
recorded in DVD video discs: ﬁlm content (pictures
recorded from ﬁlms at 24 frames per second) and
video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per
second). Make this selection according to the type of
content being viewed.

Function setup
EJECT

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

0–9

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level
that you have set.
It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

ENTER

RETURN

Setting details (continued)
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Parental

: Off
English

QSound
Subtitle
TV
Password
Screen

: Change
English
4:3
On

Audio
Display

: On
English

Picture Mode

: Auto

JPEG Interval

: 5 Seconds

Screen Saver

: On

Parental control setting
Some discs are speciﬁed as not suitable for children. Such
discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8.
The limitation will be more severe as the level
number is lower. Then press ENTER.

QSet the new password

1) Press or to select “Password”, then press
ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will
appear.
2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current
password (If the password has not been set yet
after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen
will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input
the new password.
4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been
set. Be sure to remember this number!
If you forget the password

• If each setup (pages 58 ~ 60 ) has completed, the unit
can always work under the same condition (especially with
DVD discs).
Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn
the power off.

Note:

1

Load a DVD disc.

2

If the DVD disc has been designed to
temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen
which follows the “Reading” screen will
change, depending on which disc is played.
If you select “YES” with the ENTER key,
password input screen will then appear.
• If “NO” is selected, press EJECT to remove
the disc.

3

Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).
Then press ENTER.

1) Press EJECT to remove the disc.
2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and
then press STOP on the unit. “Password Clear”
appears on the screen. Now the password
has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).
Note:

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc
• This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until
the disc is ejected.
When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be
set again automatically.

Function setup

1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press
ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9).
(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this
unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list
will appear.
• Level Off: The parental control setting does not
function.
• Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be
played back.
• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be
played back.

DVD

To exit from the entry, press
RETURN.
Enter Password

Note:
• The parental control level is equivalent to the following
USA movie ratings.
Level 1: G
Level 2:
Level 3: PG
Level 4: PG-13

•
•
•
•

Level 5:
Level 6: R
Level 7: NC-17
Level 8:

The parental control levels for other countries/area
than U.S. are included for future use. Check the
appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD
video disc equipped with the parental control feature
in the future.
Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.
Some discs may not be encoded with speciﬁc rating
level information though its disc jacket says “adult.”
For those discs, the age restriction will not work.
The password is required every time when you
change the parental level.
If you input a wrong number, press EXIT/CANCEL.

4

Playback will commence if the entered
password is correct.

61

60

Others

Understanding the Power Return feature
If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV/DVD and the power is resupplied, the Power Return feature will
turn the TV/DVD on automatically. If the power is going to be off for a long time or you are going to be away from the
TV/DVD for a long time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent the TV/DVD from turning on in your
absence.

Troubleshooting

SYMPTOMS

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or
service outlet if problems persist.
Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.

SYMPTOMS

POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

PAGE

TV/DVD does not operate.

• No disc is loaded.
• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.
• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc.

42
7
8

No picture.

• TV/DVD selector is not set correctly.

42

No sound.

• Check the input selector of the ampliﬁer is set properly.
• The unit is in the special playback mode.
• Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV ampliﬁer.

Picture is distorted during fast
reverse/forward playback.

• The picture will be distorted occasionally.

-

Stopping playback, search,
slowmotion play, repeat play, or
program play, etc. cannot be
performed.

• Some discs may not do some of the functions.

-

No on-screen display.

• Set Display to On.

The unit or remote operation key
is not functioning.

• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes,
then replug it.

Playback does not start when
the title is selected.

• Check the Parental setup.

60

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle
language is not changed when
you playback a DVD.

• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.

50

No subtitle.

• Some discs have no subtitles.
• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.

50

Angle cannot be changed.

• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.

49

“” appears on the screen.

• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.

44

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.
• Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.
• Clear the path of the beam.
• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.
• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

13

19

TV BROADCAST RECEPTION
Poor sound or No sound.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.
• Check Volume adjustments or mute.
• Check for sources of possible interference.

25
25, 26
64

Poor picture or No picture.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.
• Check for sources of possible interference.
• Check Picture setting.

25
14, 15
64
35

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.
• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.
• Check for sources of possible interference.

Poor color or no color.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.
• Make sure channels are set into memory.
• Check Picture setting.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.
• Check for sources of possible interference.

25
22
35
14, 15
64

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.
• Make sure channels are set into memory.
• Cable TV company is scrambling signal.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

25
22
14, 15

Picture wobbles or drifts.

25
14
64

No CATV reception.

• Check all Cable TV connections.
• Set Air/Cable selection to the Cable position.
• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.

Horizontal or diagonal bars on
screen.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.
• Check for sources of possible interference.

14, 15
64

No reception above channel 13.

• Make sure Air/Cable selection is in the appropriate position.
• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections.

22
14

TV shuts off.

• Auto shut off feature worked.
• Sleep Timer is set.
• Power interrupted.

41
26
-

Closed - Caption is not
activated.

• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed
captioned. Try another channel.
• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or
rotate antenna.
• Set “CC Setting” to “On” to turn on the closed caption decoder.

Display is not shown in your
language.

• Select proper language in the menu options.

62

15
22
25

44
18, 19

58
-

REMOTE CONTROL

The remote control does not
function.

25
14, 15
33
21

63

Others

Poor reception on some
channels.

PAGE

Playback doesn·t start.

POWER
• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured.
• Try another AC outlet.
• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

DVD

Others

Reception disturbances
Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna.
Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown
below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may
be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast.

Language code list
Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 58 .

Language Name

Code

Language Name

Code

Language Name

Code

Language Name

Code

Abkhazian

1112

Fiji

1620

Lingala

2224

Singhalese

2919

Afar

1111

Finnish

1619

Lithuanian

2230

Slovak

2921

Afrikaans

1116

French

1628

Macedonian

2321

Slovenian

2922

IGNITION

Albanian

2927

Frisian

1635

Malagasy

2317

Somali

2925

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may ﬂutter or
drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems,
neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair
dryers.

Amharic

1123

Galician

1722

Malay

2329

Spanish

1529

Arabic

1128

Georgian

2111

Malayalam

2322

Sundanese

2931

Armenian

1835

German

1415

Maltese

2330

Swahili

2933

Assamese

1129

Greek

1522

Maori

2319

Swedish

2932

Aymara

1135

Greenlandic

2122

Marathi

2328

Tagalog

3022

Azerbaijani

1136

Guarani

1724

Moldavian

2325

Tajik

3017

Bashkir

1211

Gujarati

1731

Mongolian

2324

Tamil

3011

GHOSTS

Basque

1531

Hausa

1811

Nauru

2411

Tatar

3030

Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is
the direct path and the other is reﬂected by tall buildings, hills or other
large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may
improve the reception.

Bengali; Bangla

1224

Hebrew

1933

Nepali

2415

Telugu

3015
3018

SNOW

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI)
Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving
ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a
loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of
the antenna or installing an RFI ﬁlter may improve the picture.

1436

Hindi

1819

Norwegian

2425

Thai

Bihari

1218

Hungarian

1831

Oriya

2528

Tibetan

1225

Breton

1228

Icelandic

1929

Panjabi

2611

Tigrinya

3019

Bulgarian

1217

Indonesian

1924

Pashto, Pushto

2629

Tonga

3025

Burmese

2335

Interlingua

1911

Persian

1611

Turkish

3028

Byelorussian

1215

Irish

1711

Polish

2622

Turkmen

Cambodian

2123

Italian

1930

Portuguese

2630

Twi

3033

Catalan

1311

Japanese

2011

Quechua

2731

Ukrainian

3121

Chinese

3618

Javanese

2033

Rhaeto-Romance

2823

Urdu

3128

Corsican

1325

Kannada

2124

Romanian

2825

Uzbek

3136

Croatian

1828

Kashmiri

2129

Russian

2831

Vietnamese

3219

Czech

1329

Kazakh

2121

Samoan

2923

Volapük

3225

Danish

1411

Kirghiz

2135

Sanskrit

2911

Welsh

1335

Dutch

2422

Korean

2125

Scots Gaelic

1714

Wolof

3325

English

1524

Kurdish

2131

Serbian

2928

Xhosa

3418

Esperanto

1525

Laothian

2225

Serbo-Croatian

2918

Yiddish

2019

Estonian

1530

Latin

2211

Shona

2924

Yoruba

3525

Faroese

1625

Latvian, Lettish

2232

Sindhi

2914

Zulu

3631

3021

Others

If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception
area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture.
If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external
antenna may be necessary.

Bhutani

CARE AND MAINTENANCE
To prevent ﬁre or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning.
Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

65

64

Others

Specifications
Model

15LV505

General
Power supply

AC 120V 60Hz

Power consumption

Operation: 35 W, Stand by: 0.8 W

Weight

7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)

Dimensions

Width: 15-13/16 inches (402 mm)
Height: 12-5/8 inches (320 mm)
Depth: 5-1/2 inches (140.1 mm)

Operating temperature

5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)

Operating humidity

Less than 80% RH (No condensation)

Television
LCD panel (Screen size is approximate.)

15-inch diagonal

Display method

Color TFT LCD

Number of pixels

1366 (Horizontal) x 768 (Vertical)

Television system

NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM

Receiving channels

VHF: 2-13
UHF: 14-69
CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84)

Antenna input

VHF/UHF 75 ohm

Speaker

1-3/16 x 2-13/16 inches (30.5 x 71.1 mm), 8 ohm x 2

Audio output power

1.5W + 1.5W

Limited United States Warranty
LCD TV/DVD Combination - Depot Repair Warranty
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original
consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE
ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE
OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED
BY THESE WARRANTIES.
LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED
BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor
TACP warrants this LCD TV/DVD Combination
and its parts against defects in materials or
workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
the date of original retail purchase. DURING
THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP·S OPTION,
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH
A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT
CHARGE TO YOU.

DVD/CD player
Signal system

NTSC

Applicable disc

1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)
2. CD (12cm, 8cm)

Pickup

1-Lens, 2-Beams System

Input/Output
S-Video input

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1
(C) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm

ColorStream video input

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1
(PB, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 2

Video input

1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1

Audio input

–8dBm, 50 kohm, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

Digital audio output (Coaxial)

0.5 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 1

Headphone

ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1

Accessories
Remote control (SE-R0305) ................................................................................................... 1
Batteries (R03/AAA) .............................................................................................................. 2
AC cord .................................................................................................................................. 1
Owner·s manual (this booklet) ..................................................... .......................................... 1
Quick setup guide (Spanish) .................................................................................................. 1

• This model complies with the above speciﬁcations.
• Designs and speciﬁcations are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or speciﬁcations that may be added in the future.

66

Commercial Units
LCD TV/DVD Combinations sold and used for
commercial purposes have a limited warranty for all
parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date
of original retail purchase and ends on the date that
is ninety (90) days thereafter.
Owner·s Manual and Product Registration Card
Read this owner·s manual thoroughly before operating
this LCD TV/DVD Combination.
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration
card or register your LCD TV/DVD Combination
online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as
possible. By registering your LCD TV/DVD
Combination you will enable TACP to bring you
new products speciﬁcally designed to meet your
needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely
event a safety notiﬁcation is required under the
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to
complete and return the product registration card
does not diminish your warranty rights.

(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide
other proof of purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this LCD TV/DVD
Combination must be made by the Depot
Warranty Repair Center speciﬁed by the TACP
Consumer Solutions Center.
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only
if the LCD TV/DVD Combination is purchased
and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or
Puerto Rico.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation,
setup, adjustment of customer controls, and
installation or repair of antenna systems are not
covered by this warranty. Reception problems
caused by inadequate antenna systems are
your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials
or workmanship as limited above, and do not
extend to any LCD TV/DVD Combination or
parts that have been lost or discarded by you
or to damage to the LCD TV/DVD Combination
or parts caused by ﬁres, misuse, accident,
Acts of God (such as lightning or ﬂuctuations in
electric power), improper installation, improper
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions
furnished by TACP; use or malfunction
through simultaneous use of this LCD TV/DVD
Combination and connected equipment; or to
units that have been modiﬁed or had the serial
number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered
illegible.

67

Others

Rental Units
The warranty for LCD TV/DVD Combination rental
units begins on the date of the ﬁrst rental or thirty
(30) days after the date of shipment to the rental
ﬁrm, whichever comes ﬁrst.

Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

CAUTION
THIS LCD COLOR TELEVISION EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,
CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.
VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA
RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,
21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING
The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.
Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the
time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.
Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode
at the time of repair.
• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.
• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.
• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING
1. KEEP THE NOTICES
As for the places which need special attentions,
they are indicated with the labels or seals on the
cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the
indications and notices in the operation manual.

2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK
There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an
electric shock while the electric current is
flowing.

3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS

6. PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER
SERVICING
Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which
were removed in order to service are put in the
original positions, or whether there are the
portions which are deteriorated around the
serviced places serviced or not. Check the
insulation between the antenna terminal or
external metal and the AC cord plug blades.
And be sure the safety of that.
(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)

The parts in this equipment have the specific
characters of incombustibility and withstand
voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is
replaced should be used the part which has
the same character.
Especially as to the important parts for safety
which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the
table of parts as a
mark, the designated
parts must be used.

4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE
LCD PANEL

1. Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.
2. Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn
on the TV.
3. Insulation resistance between the cord plug
terminals and the eternal exposure metal
[Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by
using the 500V insulation resistance meter
[Note 1].
4. If the insulation resistance is less than 1M
ohm, the inspection repair should be
required.
[Note 1]

Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing.
Take enough care to deal with it.

If you have not the 500V insulation
resistance meter, use a Tester.

5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE
ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER
ASSEMBLING OR WIRING

[Note 2]

External exposure metal: Antenna terminal
Headphone jack

There are parts which use the insulation
material such as a tube or tape for safety, or
which are assembled in the condition that
these do not contact with the printed board.
The inside wiring is designed not to get closer
to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts.
Therefore, put these parts in the original
positions.

HOW TO ORDER PARTS
Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)
1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER
The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be
found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.
2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION
You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

A1-2

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1) Read these instructions.
2)

Keep these instructions.

3)

Heed all warnings.

4)

Follow all instructions.

5)

Do not use this apparatus near water.

6)

Clean only with dry cloth.

7)

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8)

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.

9)

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
S3126A
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
15) Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such a vases,
shall be placed on the apparatus.
16) An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as
contact with them might be fatal.
17) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
18) Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

A1-3

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

19) If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is
grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD
IN WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)

ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT

GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A

20) When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
21) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
22) Keep your fingers clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause injury.
23) When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from
the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's
manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
24) Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume
sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

A1-4

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

25) Do not allow the product to output distorted sound for an extended period of time. It may cause speaker
overheating and fire.
26) When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.
27) Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the
laser beam. It may cause eye damage.
28) Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury and product malfunction.
29) This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
CONDENSATION
Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a
warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly. When this happens, player's performance will
be impaired.
To prevent this, let the player stand in its new surroundings for about an hour before switching it on, or
make sure that the room temperature rises gradually.
Condensation may also form during the summer if the player is exposed to the breeze from an air conditioner. In such cases, change the location of the player.
HOW TO HANDLE THE LCD PANEL
• Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur.
• If the LCD panel is broken, make absolutely sure that you do not touch the liquid in the panel. This may
cause skin inflammation.
If the liquid gets in your mouth, immediately gargle and consult with your doctor. Also, if the liquid gets in
your eyes or touches your skin, consult with your doctor after rinsing for at least 15 minutes or longer in clean
water.

A1-5

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig.
1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]
Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD
MT PCB connector.
NOTE
• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the
Flux smoke away from it.
Pick Up PCB

Short circuit using a
soldering iron.

Fig. 1

A1-6

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2. Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)
3. Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.
DVD Deck

Belt Loading

Fig. 1

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL
4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.
Press and hold the “STOP” button on the top panel.
Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.
Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.
The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.
The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

A1-7

REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE

1
5

4
3
7

8

10

11

13

14
15
18

16
19

17

20

21
22

24
23

2
6
9
12

25
28

26
27
29
30

31
32

33

34

36

37

40

41

44

45

47

48

49

35
38
42
46

39
43

NEC Format
Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H
No.
Key Name
Custom Code Key Code
1 EJECT
45 BA
F5
2 TV/DVD
45 BC
B3
3 SLEEP
40 BF
15
4 POWER
40 BF
12
5 1
40 BF
01
6 2
40 BF
02
7 3
40 BF
03
8 4
40 BF
04
9 5
40 BF
05
10 6
40 BF
06
11 7
40 BF
07
12 8
40 BF
08
13 9
40 BF
09
14 DISPLAY
40 BF
1C
15 0
40 BF
00
16
/ JUMP
44 BB
9B
17 SUBTITLE
44 BB
87
18 CH UP
40 BF
1B
19 VOLUME +
40 BF
1A
20 AUDIO SELECT
44 BB
53
21 INPUT/ZOOM
40 BF
0F
22 CH DOWN
40 BF
1F
23 VOLUME 40 BF
1E
24 MUTE
40 BF
10
25 PLAY MODE
40 BF
1D
26 DVD MENU
40 BF
19
27 UP
44 BB
80
28 LEFT
44 BB
51
29 ENTER
44 BB
4E
30 RIGHT
44 BB
4D
31 DOWN
44 BB
81
32 MENU/SETUP
40 BF
0E
33 EXIT/CANCEL
44 BB
EF
34 PAUSE
44 BB
10
35 PLAY
44 BB
15
36 STOP
44 BB
14
37 CH RTN/|<>
44 BB
13
40 CLOSED CAPTION/SKIP>>| 40 BF
57
41 <|SLOW
45 BA
0E
42 ANGLE
44 BB
96
43 MARKER
45 BA
EC
44 SLOW |>
44 BB
0D
45 TOP MENU
44 BB
DF
46 RETURN
44 BB
5D
47 REPEAT A-B
44 BB
5C
48 GAME
40 BF
28
49 PICTURE SIZE
40 BF
59
A1-8

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1

TV
System

LCD

LCD Size / Visual Size
LCD Type
Number of Pixels
View Range

Left/Right
Up/Down

Bright Dot
Zero Bright Dot Ratio
Color System
Speaker

Sound Output
G-2

DVD System

Position
Size
Impedance
Max
10%(Typical)

Color System
Disc
Disc Diameter
Drive
Search speed

Fwd
Actual
Rev
Actual

Slow speed

Fwd
Actual
Rev
Actual

G-3

Tuning
System

Broadcasting System
Tuner and
Receive CH
CH Coverage
Intermediate Digital
Frequency Analog

G-4

Signal

Analog
Digital
System
Destination

Picture(FP)
Sound(FS)
FP-FS

Preset CH
Stereo/Dual TV Sound
Tuner Sound Muting
Video Signal
Input Level
Output Level
S/N Ratio (Weighted)
Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode
RGB Signal
Audio Signal

Output Level
Input Level
Output Level

at DVD
at TV

Digital Output Level
S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted)
Harmonic Distortion
Frequency Response :
at DVD
at Video CD
at SVCD
at CD

A2-1

15.6 inch / 394.9mmV
Color TFT LCD
1366(H) x 768(V)
85/85 degree
80/80 degree
<
n=0
--NTSC
2 Speaker
Front
1.2 x 2.8 inch
8 ohm
1.5W + 1.5W
--NTSC
DVD, CDDVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)
120 mm , 80 mm
DSM-2
4 step
2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
4 step
2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
1/7 -1/2 times
-1/7 -1/2 times
-US System M
ATSC(8VSB)/QAM
1Tuner
US (W/CABLE)
2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84
44.00MHz
45.75MHz
41.25MHz
4.50MHz
No
US-Stereo
Yes
1 V p-p/75 ohm
------8.0dBm/50k ohm
---0.5 V p-p/75 ohm
-------

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-5

Power

Power Source

AC
DC

Power Consumption

Protector

at AC
at DC
Stand by (at AC)
Energy Star
Per Year
Power Fuse
Safety Circuit
IC Protector(Micro Fuse)
Safety
Radiation
Laser
Operation
Storage
Space Around Unit

G-6

Regulation

G-7

Temperature

G-8
G-9

Operating Humidity
Clock and
Clock
(Only Broadcasting data)
Timer
Sleep Timer
Max Time
On Timer
Program
Off Timer
Program
Game Timer
Wake Up Timer
Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode)
more than

A2-2

120V, 60Hz
-35W at 120V 60Hz
-0.8W at 120V 60Hz
Yes
-- kWh/Year
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL(UL6500_2nd)
FCC
DHHS
+5oC ~ +40oC
-20oC ~ +60oC
100 mm(4inch)
Less than 80% RH
No
120 Min
No
No
No
No
-Min
Sec

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-10

Remote
Control

Unit
Glow in Dark Remocon
Remocon Format
Format
Custom Code
Power Source
Voltage(D.C)
UM size x pcs
Total Keys
Keys
Power
Eject
Sleep
TV/DVD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Jump / Display
Subtitle
Audio Select
Input Select / Zoom
Mute
CH Up
CH Down
Vol Up
Vol Down
Play Mode
DVD Menu
Up
Down
Left
Right
Enter
Menu / Setup
Exit / Cancel
Game
Picture Size
Pause
Play
Stop
Skip+ / Closed Caption
Skip- / CH Return
Search+
SearchSlow+
SlowAngle
Marker
Top Menu
Return
Closed Caption
Repeat A-B
Zoom/ Quick View
Freeze frame

RC-LT
Yes
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h
3V
UM-4 x 2 pcs
49 Keys
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No

A2-3

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-11

Features

Auto Shut Off
Auto Search
Power On Memory
Comb Filter

Yes
No

Game Position
Auto Setup(Language/CH Program)
Picture Setting(TV)
Picture Preference
Brightness , Contrast , Color
Tint
Sharpness
Color Temperature
DNR
Cable Clear
Picture Setting(PC)
HOR Position , VER Position
Phase, Clock
Red, Green, Blue
Auto Adjust
Backlight
Audio
MTS
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance)
Stable Sound
Surround
BBE
SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass)
Variable Audio Out
Tuning
CH Program
Air/Cable
ADD/DELETE
Label
CH Label
Video Label
Favorite CH
V-Chip
Type
RRT Setup
Lock
Hotel Lock
Channel Lock
Video Lock
Panel Lock

Yes
Yes
3 -D
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
USA Type
Yes
No
No
No
No
English
French
Spanish
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Menu Language
Closed Caption
CC Advanced
Picture Size
HD Zoom
Picture Scroll
Film Mode
Aspect
Backlight
PFC(Power Factor circuit)
Freeze frame
PIP/POP
Direct Input Selection
Digital Out
Dolby Digital
MPEG
PCM
DTS

No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

A2-4

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
PC Monitor Input

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

VGA (640x480)
VGA (720x400)
WVGA (848x480)
SVGA (800x600)
XGA (1024x768)
WXGA (1280x768)
WXGA (1280x720)
WXGA (1360x768)
SXGA (1280x1024)
HDMI Input
VGA (640×480)
720×480i (4:3)
720×480i (16:9)
720×480p (4:3)
720×480p (16:9)
720×576i (4:3)
720×576i (16:9)
720×576p (4:3)
720×576p (16:9)
1280×720p
1920×1080i
CEC (ORION Standard)
Deep Color
xvYCC
Component Input

Wall Mount
Features
(DVD)

Yes
Yes (60Hz)
Yes (60Hz)
Yes (60Hz)
Yes (60Hz)

720×480i (4:3)
720×480i (16:9)
720×480p (4:3)
720×480p (16:9)
720×576i (4:3)
720×576i (16:9)
720×576p (4:3)
720×576p (16:9)
1280×720p
1920×1080i
Size W x H(mm)
Screw Size

No
No
No
No
Yes (60Hz)
Yes (60Hz)
No
No
Yes

Video CD Playback
SVCD Playback
MP3 Playback
JPEG
WMA
Divx Playback
Digital Out

Down Mix Out
Closed Caption
Screen Saver
TV Screen

No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No

DMF Support
(Dolby Digital)
(MPEG)
(PCM)
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
(DTS)

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes

4:3 (Letter Box, Pan Scan)
16:9 (Wide)

Audio DAC

A2-5

No
Yes
Yes
192kHz / 24bit

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-12

Accessories

Owner's Manual

Language
w/Guarantee Card

English
Yes
Yes

Poles
Terminal

---

Terminal

--

Remote Control Unit
Rod Antenna

No

No

Loop Antenna

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

U/V Mixer
DC Car Cord (Center+)
Guarantee Card
Warning Sheet
Circuit Diagram
Antenna Change Plug
Service Facility List
Important Safeguard
Dew/AHC Caution Sheet
Quick Set-up Sheet(Spanish)
Battery
UM size x pcs
OEM Brand
AC Adapter
AC Cord (for AC Adapter)
AC Cord
AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin)
Registration Card (NDL Card)
300 to 75ohm Antenna Adapter
Sheet Information (Return)
Sheet Information (HDMI)
Cleaning Cloth

Yes
Yes
UM-4 x 2 pcs
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes(USA version)
No
No

A2-6

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-13

Interface

Switch

Top

Rear
Indicator

Terminals

G-14

Set Size

G-15

Weight

Rear

Power (Tact)
Channel Up/Menu Up/Play
Channel Down/Menu Down/Stop
Volume Up/Menu >
Volume Down/Menu <
Menu
Play
Eject
Skip+, Search+
Skip-, SearchStill/Pause
Stop
Main Power SW
Input Select/Enter
Main Power SW
Power/Stand-By
Power Wake Up
On Timer
Video Input 1
Audio Input 1
S - Input 1
Video Input 2
Audio Input 2
S - Input 2
Video Output
Audio Output
Component Input 1
Analog Audio
Component Input 2
Analog Audio
HDMI Input 1
Analog Audio
HDMI Input 2
Analog Audio
Sub Woofer Out
PC Monitor Input
Analog Audio
Digital Audio Output
DC Jack (Center +)
VHF/UHF Antenna Input
Video Input 3
Audio Input 3
S - Input 3
Other Terminal
AC Inlet
Approx. W x D x H (mm)
w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm)

Net (Approx.)
Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.)
Gross (Approx.)

A2-7

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No (CH+ Alternative)
Yes
No
No
No
No (CH- Alternative)
No
Yes
No
Yes (Blue / Red)
No
No
RCA x 1
RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
RCA x 3
RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Coaxial
No
F Type
No
No
No
Headphone
Yes
402.0 x 140.1 x 320.0
402.0 x 64.0 x 289.0
3.5kg
(7.7 lbs)
3.3kg
(7.3 lbs)
5.0kg
(11.0 lbs)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-16

Carton

G-17

Material

G-18

Environment

Master Carton
Content
Material
Dimensions
W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
Gift Box Material
W/Color Photo Label
W/Handle
Dimensions
W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
Drop Test
Height (cm)
Container Stuffing (40' container)
w/Pallet
w/Wrapping
Cabinet
Front
Rear
Jack Panel
PCB
Non-Halogen Demand
Eyelet Demand
Environmental standard requirement
Pb-free
Measures for Whisker

A2-8

No
--- Sets
--- / ------Double/Full Color
No
Yes
474 x404 x 210
Yes
Natural Dropping At 2 Corner / 2 Edges / 3 Surfaces
80
Sets/40' container
1551
No
No
PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
-No
Yes
Green procurement of ORION
Phase3(Phase3A)
Yes

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-3: POWER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS
AND P.C. BOARDS

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the 2 screws (1).
Remove the Sheet Pc-1 in the direction of arrow (A).
Remove the Angle Lcd-R in the direction of arrow (B).
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP501, CP2201 and CP8101).
5. Remove the 5 screws (2).
6. Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

CAUTION
Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because
the FFC cable may be damaged.
1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the 2 screws (1).
Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).
Unlock the support (2).
Remove the Cover Back in the direction of arrow (B).
Remove the 6 screws (3).

(1)

(1)

Sheet Pc-1

(A)
Angle Lcd-R

(B)

(2)
Stand Ass'y

(1)

(3)

(2)

(2)

(2)
(2)

CP8101

Power PCB

(1)

CP501
(C)

(3)
(3)

(A)

(2)

(3)

Support

(3)
(B)

CP2201

Cover Back

Fig. 1-3
1-4: DIGITAL PCB AND OPERATION PCB
(Refer to Fig. 1-4)

(3)

Fig. 1-1

1.
2.
3.
4.

1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND
REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2)
1. Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of
arrow (A).
2. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CD7005 and CP2804).
3. Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B).
4. Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).
5. Unlock the support (1).
6. Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove the 2 screws (1).
Remove the Sheet Pc-2 in the direction of arrow (A).
Remove the Angle Lcd-L in the direction of arrow (B).
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP3001 and CP3002).
Remove the 4 screws (2).
Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
Remove the Shield Digital in the direction of arrow (D).
Remove the 2 screws (3).
Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (E).
(1)
(1)

Sheet Pc-2

(A)
CP3001

(2)
(2)

Angle Lcd-L

CP3002
Front Cabinet Ass'y

LCD Panel

Operation PCB

(A)

(2)

(3)

(B)
(2)

(3)
(C)

(D)

Digital PCB

(E)
Shield Digital

Remocon PCB
CD7005

(B)
CP7601

(C)
(1)

Support

Fig. 1-4
CP2804

Fig. 1-2
B1-1

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-5: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
1. Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a
soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no
soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
2. Remove the 3 screws (1).
3. Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).
4. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).
5. Remove the support (2).
6. Remove the Cover DVD in the direction of arrow (B).
7. Remove the 2 screws (3).
8. Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (C).
9. Remove the 4 screws (4).
10.Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (D).
(2)
Cover DVD

Support
Angle Mpeg

(1)

(B)

(1)
(D)
CP2303
CP2302
CP2301
DVD MT PCB
Pick Up PCB

(4)

(C)
(4) (4)
(1)
DVD Deck

(3)
Short circuit using a
soldering iron.

(A)

(3)

Fig. 1-5
NOTE
1. Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF
SERVICING"
2. Use the Lead Free solder.
3. Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing
equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke
away from it.
5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering
on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up
PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

B1-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS
Check Hook

NOTE

Check Hook

Check Hook

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed
here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly
is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace
the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.

Loader Ass'y (Top Side)

Remove the 3 screws (1).
Unlock the 2 supports (2).
Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y.
Remove the Traverse Ass'y.

(2)
(2)
Loader Sub Ass'y

Insulator (R)

Traverse Ass'y

(1)

Fig. 2-1-D
2-2: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK
FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)
1. Remove the Insulator (F).
2. Remove the Insulator (R).
3. Unlock the support (1).
4. Remove the Gear Middle.
5. Remove the screw (2).
6. Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.
7. Remove the screw (3).
8. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
9. Remove the screw (4).
10. Remove the Gear Feed.
11. Remove the 2 screws (5).
12. Remove the Feed Motor.
13. Remove the Gear Motor.

(1)
(1)

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm

Fig. 2-1-A

Feed Motor
Gear Motor

NOTE

Traverse Ass'y

1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire
on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.

Insulator (R)

Insulator (F)

Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)

(5)

(1)
(5)

Gear Feed

(4)

Insulator (F)

Check Lock

Rack Feed Ass'y

Check Lock

Gear Middle

(2)
Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-B

Switch PCB Ass'y

(3)
80 ± 5mm

Loader Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)

Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-C

B2-1

Fig. 2-2-A

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
1. When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to
align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.
2. In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value
of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.
3. When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it
correctly as Fig. 2-2-D.
Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
4. After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire
on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E.

Traverse Ass'y
Check Hook

Check Hook
Check Hook

Check Hook
• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

Fig. 2-2-E

2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING
1. When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as
shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.

Rack Feed Ass'y

NOTE
Push

Push

[OK]

1. Do not make the folding lines except the specified
positions for the FFC.

[NG]

[ 24 pin FFC ]
Fold it by 90û
To Pick Up PCB

Printing Surface

Fig. 2-2-B
20 ± 1mm

30 ± 1mm
Gear Motor

8.0 ± 0.2mm

Fig. 2-3-A
Feed Motor

[ 6 pin FFC ]
40 ± 1mm
Safety surface for pressing
of the insert.

Printing Surface

Switch PCB Ass'y

Fold

Fig. 2-2-C

~ FEED MOTOR ~
WHITE (4)
BROWN (3)

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fig. 2-3-B

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
YELLOW (2)
GREEN (1)

Fig. 2-2-D

B2-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
FLAT PACKAGE IC
REMOVAL

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after
desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using
tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC
desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)
NOTE

1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
IC to protect other parts from any damage.
(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be
careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC
leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within
10 mm distance from IC leads.

Masking Tape
(Cotton Tape)

Blower type IC
desoldering
machine

IC

Tweezers

Fig. 3-1
IC

Fig. 3-3

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering
machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)
4. Peel off the Masking Tape.

NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC
can move back and forth easily after desoldering the
leads completely.

5. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)
NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical
direction towards the IC pattern.

Blower type IC
desoldering machine

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

IC

IC pattern

Fig. 3-2

B3-1

Fig. 3-4

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION
1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the
new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder
each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the
soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

IC

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-8

Solder temporarily

Solder temporarily

Fig. 3-5

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the
IC using a magnifying glass.
Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering
position and installation position of the parts around the
IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads
sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)

Solder

IC

NOTE
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or
repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the
bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be
damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this
case.

Soldering Iron

Supply soldering
from upper position
to lower position

Fig. 3-6
3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron
IC

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 3-7
B3-2

SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.
To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote
control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)
Set
Condition

Set Key

Remocon
Key

Standard
Time

TV mode

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

0

2 sec.

Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.

TV mode

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

1

2 sec.

Initialization of factory TV data.
NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such
as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

DVD mode
(No disc)

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

4

2 sec.

Initialization of factory DVD data.

DVD mode
(No disc)

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

5

2 sec.

DVD Write mode.
Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

6

2 sec.

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.
Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.
Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

8

2 sec.

Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.
Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

ALL mode

VOL. DOWN
(Minimum)

9

2 sec.

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.
Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display
Adjustment).

DVD mode
(No disc)

STOP

1

2 sec.

DVD mode
(No disc)

STOP

7

2 sec.

Operations

DCheck of the firmware
V version.
D
Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.
Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".

C-1

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
JG176 Up-Date Disc

Ref. No.

Part No.

JG176

APJG176144

Remarks

Parts Name
Up-Date Disc

Up-Date of the Firmware

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE
1. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
2. Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4. Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.
5. Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)
6. Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.
At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon.
Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.
7. After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.
8. Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.
After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.
9. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
10. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.
11. Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.
CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION
12. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
13. Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.
F/W Ver. ADLJD8718A
Initialize: Complete
Laser drive time
DVD LD: 0Hour
CD LD : 0Hour

A D L J D 8 7 1 8 A

Fixed

Released times on the same date
Release date (Example: 2008.07.18)

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.
14. Turn off the power

C-2

A = October
B = November
C = December

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION
Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are
displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".
Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.
NOTE:The each item value might be different according to each set.
CHECK SUM: 403F

Initial setting data check sum.

LCD PWR ON: 0000

POWER ON total hours.

Sub Micon check version

SUB:

DA0E783212

Main Micon check version

DTV:

CA01I85291

EEPROM check version
Parameter

=
+
+
+

(16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)
(16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)
(16 x tens digit value)
(ones digit value)

EEPROM: J51T01PM00
Picture: pic_CA01I0003

FIG. 1

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken
to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.
NOTE: No need to set data other position than 7200~79FF.
ADDRESS

INIT : 0001

DATA

0099

SUB: DA0E783212
DTV: CA01I85291
EEPROM: J51T01PM00

FIG. 2
4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS
until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.
5. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
6. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.
7. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.
9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.
10. Turn on the Power.
11. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
12. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
13. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

NO.
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
29
30

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the
circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.
CAUTION
• Use an isolation transformer when performing any
service on this chassis.
• When removing a PCB or related component, after
unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire
back in its original position.
• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink,
apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat
sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the
old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to
the IC and Transistor).
Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical
adjustments.
1. Pattern Generator

FUNCTION
R DRIVE(N)
R CUT OFF(N)
G DRIVE(N)
G CUT OFF(N)
B DRIVE(N)
B CUT OFF(N)
R DRIVE(C)
R CUT OFF(C)
G DRIVE(C)
G CUT OFF(C)
B DRIVE(C)
B CUT OFF(C)
R DRIVE(W)
R CUT OFF(W)
G DRIVE(W)
G CUT OFF(W)
B DRIVE(W)
B CUT OFF(W)
BAK LIGHT CENT
BAK LIGHT MAX

NO.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50

FUNCTION
BAK LIGHT MIN
BRIGHTNESS CENT
BRIGHTNESS MAX
BRIGHTNESS MIN
TINT
SHARP H1 MAX
SHARP H1 MIN
SHARP H2 MAX
SHARP H2 MIN
SHARP V1 MAX
SHARP V1 MIN
CONTRAST CENTER
CONTRAST MAX
CONTRAST MIN
COLOR CENTER
COLOR MAX
COLOR MIN
CONTRAST 40

Fig. 1-2

On-Screen Display Adjustment

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS

1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
2. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the
channel button (9) on the remote control for more than
2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as
shown in Fig. 1-1.

2-1: WHITE BALANCE
1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 20 minutes.
2. Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern
Generator.
3. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control
to set to the AV mode.
4. Using the remote control, set the brightness and
contrast to normal position.
5. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-2 and
press the channel button (03) on the remote control to
select "R DRIVE(N)".
6. Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control
to select the "R DRIVE (N)", "R CUT OFF (N)",
"B DRIVE (N)", "B CUT OFF (N)", "R DRIVE (C)",
"R CUT OFF (C)", "B DRIVE (C)", "B CUT OFF (C)",
"R DRIVE (W)","R CUT OFF (W), "B DRIVE (W)" or
"B CUTOFF(W)".
7. Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
to whiten the R DRIVE (N), R CUT OFF (N),
B DRIVE (N), B CUT OFF (N), R DRIVE (C),
R CUT OFF (C), B DRIVE (C), B CUT OFF (C),
R DRIVE (W) ,R CUT OFF (W), B DRIVE (W) and
B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.
8. Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white
color is achieved.

TV
FULL
480i

Function

03 R DRIVE (N)

14

Step No.

Fig. 1-1
3. Use the CH. UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9)
on the remote control to select the options shown in
Fig. 1-2.
4. Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to
end the adjustments.
5. To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, GAME,
COMPONENT and DVD mode, press the INPUT ZOOM
button on the remote control.
6. Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.
7. To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select
the digital channel.
8. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel
(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

D-1

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-2: BRIGHT CENT

2-3: CONTRAST MAX

1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 8~11.
14. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
15. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
16. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
17. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
18. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
19. Check if the picture is normal.
20. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
21. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 16~19.
22. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
23. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 16~19.
24. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
25. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
26. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
27. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
28. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "110".
29. Check if the picture is normal.

1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "151".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "149".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "156".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast max step No. becomes "126".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "113".
33. Check if the picture is normal.

D-2

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-4: CONTRAST CENTER

2-5: CONTRAST 40

1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "112".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "116".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast cent step No. becomes "94".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 19~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 19~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".
33. Check if the picture is normal.

1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "142".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "141".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "148".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast 40 step No. becomes "120".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "155".
33. Check if the picture is normal.

D-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-6: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)
Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TV/AV/GAME/COMPONENT/DVD/DTV)

NO.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
NOTE:

FUNCTION
R.DRIVE (N)
R.CUTOFF (N)
G DRIVE (N)
G CUTOFF (N)
B DRIVE (N)
B CUTOFF (N)
R.DRIVE (C)
R CUTOFF (C)
G DRIVE (C)
G CUTOFF (C)
B DRIVE (C)
B CUTOFF (C)
R.DRIVE (W)
R CUTOFF (W)
G DRIVE (W)
G CUTOFF (W)
B RRIVE (W)
B CUTOFF (W)
BAK LIGHT CENT
BAK LIGHT MAX
BAK LIGHT MIN
BRIGHT CENT
BRIGHT MAX
BRIGHT MIN
TINT
SHARP H1 MAX
SHARP H1 MIN
SHARP H2 MAX
SHARP H2 MIN
SHARP V1 MAX
SHARP V1 MIN
CONT CENTER
CONT MAX
CONT MIN
COLOR CENT
COLOR MAX
COLOR MIN
CONT 40

TV
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
128
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
130
255
0
*

AV
CVBS
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
122
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

Y/C
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
122
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

GAME
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
122
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

480i
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
121
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
170
255
0
*

COMPONENT
480p
720p
Step No.
Step No.
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
65
65
89
89
30
30
120
120
180
180
50
50
122
129
511
511
0
0
511
511
0
0
511
511
0
0
*
*
*
*
50
50
175
186
255
255
0
0
*
*

For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

D-4

1080i
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
120
180
50
129
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
186
255
0
*

DVD
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
110
180
50
122
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

480i
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
128
180
50
115
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

DTV
480p
720p
Step No.
Step No.
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
65
65
89
89
30
30
128
128
180
180
50
50
118
115
511
511
0
0
511
511
0
0
511
511
0
0
*
*
*
*
50
50
140
140
255
255
0
0
*
*

1080i
Step No.
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
*
*
0
0
*
*
65
89
30
128
180
50
122
511
0
511
0
511
0
*
*
50
140
255
0
*

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL
DVD MT PCB
DVD DECK

CP8501

CP2301

CD2001

CP2302
CP8502
CP2303
CD2301

OPERATION PCB
CD502

CP2201

CP501

CD7005

OS7601
CP7601

REMOCON PCB

CP8101

CP3002

J8104

CP3001

CP2804

CP4301

TU5801

J4301
CD6203

J301

J8102

J501

J8103

J8101

CD301

POWER PCB

SPEAKER

DIGITAL PCB

D-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(LCD SECTION)
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

Is F501 broken?

Yes

Change F501.

No

Is there voltage at pin
6 of IC501 21V?

No

Check IC501 and peripheral
circuit.

Yes

Yes
Is R510 broken?

Change R510.

No

Change POWER PCB.

E-1

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE APPEARS,
BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT
APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)

Is CD301 connected?

No

Connect CD301.

Yes

Is there signal at pins
1 and 4 of CD301?

Yes

Change SP301 and SP302.

No

Is there signal at pins
2 and 4 of IC301?

Check IC301 and peripheral
circuit.

Yes

No

Is there signal at pins
AA3 and AA4 of IC2801?

Yes

Check Connection of CP4301.

No

Is there signal at pins 1
and 2 of IC6551?

Check IC6551 and
peripheral circuit.

Yes

No

Is there signal at pin 6
of IC6552, IC6553?

Yes

Check IC6552, IC6553 and
peripheral circuit.

No

Is there signal at pin
5 of TU5801?

Yes

Check IC5801 and peripheral
circuit.

No

Change TU5801.

E-2

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE DOES NOT
APPEAR

No
Does backlight shine?

Is CD7005 connected ?

No

Connected CD7005

No

Check IC7001 and
peripheral circuit.

Yes

Yes

Is the signal pin 16
and 18 of IC7001 ?
Yes

Is the voltage at pin
20 of IC7001 12V ?

No
Check F7001.

Yes

Is CD2804 connected?

No

Connected CD2804.

Yes

No
Is there voltage at pins 1,2,3
and 16,17 of CP2804 5V?

Check Q3009 and peripheral
circuit.

Yes
Is there signal at pins
7,9,10,12,13,22,23,25,26
and 28 of CP2804?

Yes
Change V2801(PANEL).

No
Change DIGITAL PCB.

E-3

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE COLOR DOES NOT
APPEAR

Is setting of color
normal?

No
Adjust the color.

Yes

Is the color signal
received?

No
Receive the color signal.

Yes

Is there color signal
at IC2801?

No
Check IC2801 and
peripheral circuit.

Yes

Change DIGITAL PCB.

E-4

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(DVD SECTION)
DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD
PICTURE

Does this display
logo picture?

Yes
Check the disc.

No

Is there signal at pins 149
and 151 of IC4001?

Yes

Check pins 8 and 10 of
CP8501 and peripheral circuit.

No

Does IC4001 gets
P.CON+3.3V and
P.CON+1.8V?

Yes
Change IC4001.

No

Check P.CON+3.3V and
P.CON+1.8V line.

E-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DISC DOES NOT EJECT

Does OSD appear
on the screen?

No

Is remote key set
effectively?

Yes

Check pins 138 and 139
of IC4001 and peripheral
circuit.

Yes

Does this eject disc at
change DVD DECK?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

No

Is there signal at pins 4
and 5 of CP2302?

No

Check IC4001 and
peripheral circuit.

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1
and 2 of CP2302?
Yes

Change IC4001.

E-6

No
Change IC2301.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY DVD

Change DVD DECK.
No

Does this display
"INCORRECT DISC"?

Yes

No

Does CD2001 connect
with CP2301 correctly?

No

No
Change IC4001.

Yes

No
Does disc rotate?

Is the voltage between
JG017 and JG018 less
than 3.3V?
Yes

Connect CD2301.

Does this display
reading mark?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-7

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY CD

Change DVD DECK.
No

Does this display
"INCORRECT DISC"?

Yes

No

Does CD2001 connect
with CP2301 correctly?

No

No
Change IC4001.

Yes

No
Does disc rotate?

Is the voltage between
JG019 and JG018 less
than 3.3V?
Yes

Connect CD2301.

Does this display
reading mark?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-8

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG
AUDIO

Is there signal at pins
113, 114, 115 and
116 of IC4001?

No
Change IC4001.

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1
and 7 of IC8501?

No

Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501
and peripheral circuit.

Yes

No
Does CD8501 connected?

Connected CD8501.

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL
AUDIO

Is there signal at pin1
of CP8501?

Yes
Change MAIN PCB.

No

Is there signal at pin
122 of IC4001?

Yes

Check line circuit IC4001
to CP8501.

No

Change IC4001.

E-9

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

DVD LOADER
DSM2
LCD BLOCK
DUPRD1
MD_DVD, MD_CD

DUPTD1

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

TIN_SW

OPU
DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD

SPINDLE/
STEPING/
SLED
MOTOR

TR+/-, FO+/-,
MOT_LD+/-,
MOT_SLED+/MOT_SPDL+/-

Motor Drive
IC2301
LA6565VR-TLM-E

SPINDLE/SLED/
FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,
TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN

SPDIF

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
IC4001
ZR36966ELCG-D-G

DAC_VIDEO_C/D
DAC_VIDEO_A
RESET
SYS_MUTE

SPDL_SENS+/-

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW
APWM_L+/-,
APWM_R+/-

AUDIO AMP
IC8501
NJM4565M(TE1)

DVD_AUDIO_L
DVD_AUDIO_R

TX
RX
START_SW
SPDIF-134
C_VIDEO
Y_VIDEO
DVD RESET
ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_L
DVD_A_OUT_R

HA0~A19,
HD0~D15,
MEMCS0, RD, WR

SD_A0~A11
FLASH 16M
IC4007
SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

F-1

SD_D0~D15

64M SDRAM
IC4005
M12L64164A-7TG

RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,
CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS#
SD_BA0

F-2

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

CD501

J501

L501

D510

F501

AC IN

TRANSFORMER
T501

4

3

2

1

D518 C502

1

12

D515

3

11

D523

CP501__3,13. AT+12V
CP501__4,5,14.

+
5

D505

DC-DC CONVERTER
IC503
LA5797M-TE-L-E

8

6

1

Q505

Q501
POWER CONTROL IC
IC501 FA5531P-A2
1 ZCD VH 8
2 FB
3 IS

7

7 SOUND AMP 5
IC301
LA42052-E 1

FEED BACK
IC505
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

7 NC
Vcc 6

4 GND OUT 5

4

1

3

2

CP501__8.P.CON+32V
CP501__18. POWER FAIL
CP501__12.POWER_ON_H
CP501__1.FILTER_MUTE

REGULATOR
IC502 KIA431A-AT
3

1

CP501__10.INVERTER_H
CP501__9.LIGHT_CTL

T7001

DRIVE
Q7005

1

5
6

2

7

CD7005__7.LV
CD7005__8.LV

4

8

CD7005__1.HV

16
17
20
1

18

CD7005__14.HV

DRIVE
Q7004

8
11

9

INVERTER
CONTROLLER
IC7001
BD9882FV-E2

DRIVE
Q7003

4
1
14

13
2

FEED_BACK
IC7002 LM2902DR

F-3

F-4

POWER(DIGITAL PCB) BLOCK DIAGRAM
5.0V REGULATOR
IC3007
BD7820FP-E2

5.0V

3.3V REGULATOR
IC3009
S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

CP3001
2
1
6
8
3

AT3.3V

FILTER MUTE

DIGITAL TUNER
TU5801
ENG36E18KRF

TUNER+30V
AT+12V

SUB MICON
IC6202
R5F21124FP

4
5
14
7
11
12
13
15
16
17
9
10
18
20
19

AT+5.8V

EEPROM
IC2805
M24256-BWMN6TP

BTSC DEMODULATOR
IC5801
AN5832SA-E1V
VDD CORE 1V
IC3001
BD9130NV

LIGHT_CTL
INVERTER_H
POWER FAIL
KEY_B
KEY_A

SW

VDD CORE
IC3002
AL1015

1V
SCALER IC
IC2801
R8J66954BG

3.3V

1.8V REGULATOR
IC3003
PQ035ZN1HZPH

FLASH IC
IC2804
EN29LV320AB-70TCP

F-5

1.8V

DDR SDRAM
IC2802
HYB18TC256160BF-3S

LCD PANEL
V2801
M156B1-L02

LCD+B SW
Q3009
TPC6108(TE85L,F,M)

AUDIO Lch SW
IC6552
MM1501XNRE

AUDIO ADC
IC6551
AK5358A

AUDIO Rch SW
IC6553
MM1501XNRE

AUDIO Lch SW
IC6557
NJM2534V(TE2)

AUDIO Rch SW
IC6558
NJM2534V(TE2)

F-6

SIGNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

HEADPHONE JACK
J301
PJ-364H
SPEAKER L/R
SP301, SP302
SO308F01
COMPONENT Y
AMP L/R

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
J8102
IN
RCA-341H(NI)-09

COMPONENT U
AUDIO L/R
COMPONENT V

SOUND AMP IC
IC301
LA42052-E

AV 1 CVBS
CVBS _AV_IN
J8104
RCA-341H(2)NI-06

IN

AV1_A_IN_L
AUDIO Lch SW IC
IC6557
NJM2534V(TE2)

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV AUDIO_L
IN

COMPONENT AUDIO IN
J8103
RCA-228H(3)NI-02

AUDIO DATA

YUV AUDIO_R

TUNER AUDIO R

SIF
TUNER
TU5801
ENG36E18KRF

AUDIO L

AUDIO ADC IC
IC6551
AK5358A
AUDIO Rch SW IC
IC6558
NJM2534V(TE2)

IN

AUDIO Lch SW IC
IC6552
MM1501XNRE

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC
IC5801
AN5832SA -E1V

AUDIO Rch SW IC
IC6553
MM1501XNRE

LVDS DATA/CLK

LCD PANEL
V2801
M156B1-L02

AUDIO R

Y SW
IC6554
MM1501XNRE

C SW
IC6555
MM1501XNRE

SW_C_IN

SCALER IC
IC2801
R8J66954BG

TUNER AUDIO L

DIGITAL RF (IF)
ANALOG RF(CVBS)
SW_Y_IN

S-VIDEO-IN
J8101
DIN-417HA-01

IN

AV1_Y
AV1_C

DVD CP3002
19
RX
7

TX

14

DVD_A_OUT_R

15

DVD_A_OUT_L

1

SPDIF-134

16
17

SPDIF

[V]Y_VIDEO
[U]C_VIDEO

6

START_SW

4

DVD_RESET

2

ZERO

COAXIAL
J4301
RCA-101HT(OR)

F-7

DIGITAL_A_SW
IC6556
TC7PA53FU(T5L,FT)

SUB MICON
IC6202
R5F21124FP

SPDIF_OUT

F-8

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT (TOP SIDE)

DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

R2306
R2318

DMG097A

R8533

C4083

R8531

D8510
B4006

C8542

CP8501

C8521
B8504

R8528
C8528
C8527
R8527

C8525

R8516
R8539
R8535
R8536

C8543
C8537

C8536

C4006

Q2302

C4033
C4008

C4095

R4060
C4064
C4039

IC4007

W860

R4065
R4040

C4096

C4060

C4027

R4052

C4062

R4078

R4087
R4032

DMG097A

D4002

R2308

R2338
C8506

B8503

R8529

C4038

R8510

C4030

C4025
C4082

C4072

C4020

C4022

C4029

R4008

C4019
B4008

B4005

C4009

C4023

C4099

C4018

R4009

C4024

C8516

C8531

R8506

R8508
R8507
R8537

L8502

C2315

C8538

C8501
R8509

C4056

R4023

C4081

C4052

D4005

C8530

C8539
C8533

C4013

G-1

B8502

C4054

R4016
C4044

R4039

R8522

C8503

C8513
IC8501

R2339

C8541

53

C8519
C8534

R4045
R4089

C4051
C4005

W818

105

R8521
R8523

C8518

C8526

C4042

C4016

C2301

R8534
C8532

R8517

C4028
C4079

C8512

C2310

R8530
R8532

R4061
C4003

C4001

R2334

R4004
R4086

R2313

D2304

C4057

R4005

D2303
B8501

R2332
R2333

R4062

R4063
R2336

C4007

C2305
C2304

C8515

C8529

C4012

R4071

C8517

R2304
C2303

R2301

B4001
C4069

R2357

C2302

C4053

C4014

B4010

B4015

R2358

R2303

C2365

IC4001

C4011

R4003

C4105

R2302

W807

R4024

C4032
R4014

W841

R4067
R4048

R4036
R4037

C4049

C4040

C4041

R4038
R4054
W825

R2320

C4035

C2306

C2330

C8505

R4042

C2359

C8504

X4001

R4012

IC2301

R2321

W836

R4022

C4055
C4004
R2335

C4037

R2328

C4086

R4002

R2341
R2340

R4043

D4008

C4034

C2358
C2357

R2324

D4003

C2307

B4003

W804

R2326

R2307
R2337

C2360

R2342
R2349
R2352

R2310

R2327

R4001

C2326
W813
C2317
W812

R4018

IC8502

157

CP2303

R2329
R2323

1

C2319

R2305

R2319
C4085

C2350

C4076

L8501

C4002

C2309
C4059
R4019

B4002

C4075

CP8502

C2328

C8514

C4058

C2331
W803

R2330
R2325

C2348

C4015

R2360

C2321
R2353

C4010

C2339
R2350

C2316

C2341

R2309

C4091
C4021

CP2302

C8520

C2340

C2323
C2329

Q2301

B4016

B2305

R2355
CP2301_1

W824

R4053

C4077
IC4005

C4026

C4036

C4045

C4046

C4047

C4050

G-2

G-3
C2813
C2815
R2836

C2859

IC6201

C2822
C2879
C2871
C2872

C2852

C2855

NR2809

IC2805

CEH420A
C2854 C2851
C2850
R2829
C2843
C2861
R2828
C2857
C2847 C2842
C2841
C2853 C2846
C2849

R6569
X6551

C2910
C2906
C2907
C2911
C2920
C2908

C2945

R5824
R5825

C2950
R2873
R2872
C2951
Q3007

D3006

IC3009

R3034
R3033
B3014
R3032

R3041
R3045
R3042

Q3006

R3020

R3022

Q6203
R3014

C3040
R3035

C3014

B3015

C6566

C6582

C6551

IC3002

C3065
C3066

Q6204

C6572

IC6555

W856

W857

C6221

CP2801

C6577

IC6554

C6573

C6565

C6563

R3044

C5855
R2838
R2839
C6578

B6554

C2807

C6205

R2820
R2817

IC2802

R2825
R2826

R6215
R6214 R6205
R6219

R6223

C3021
B3004

X6201

R6227
R6228
R6206
R6224
R6213
R6216
R6225
C6216
C6212

C6559

C6555

R2840
W858
W846

C2935 C2943

C3049

C3048

NR2806

B2820

L3003

IC2801

NR3602
NR3601

B2810

C2883

C2891

C2923
B2821 B2811

C2806

R2815
R2813
R2814
R2812

R2811
R2810

C2808

C2812
C2811
C2810
C2809

C5819

C2882

C2867

C3047

C3023

C2869

C2877

C2866

C2876

C2974

C2975

D3005

D3007

C5844
R5819
R5820
C5845

C5801

B3003

W854
W855

C3016
R3008

C2802
W827

R2800
C2959
C2965
R2830
R2850
R2846

TU5801

C6574_1

Q3010
Q3407
B6551

R3431

C2938
R3040

IC2804

Q3011

R2807
R3631
R3630
R3629
C2903

R6585
R6583

IC3001
B3023
B3022

R3024
R3023
R3025
B3006
D3004
B3007

B5802
C2881 C2874
NR2802

R2852

Q3008

W809
B2807
B2805
B2803
B2804
R2805

C3054

B2806
NR2803

R2851

CEH420A

NR2804

B2809

CP2803

C3019

R3013
R3015
R3017
B2808

R9

NR2801

C3018

R1

C2934

B5804

R5823
R5822
R5807
R5821
R5817
C5847
R5818
NR2807
R2827
B6553
NR2808
R2824
C5821 C5822

A9

C3055

C5817
A1

R3019
R3012
C3006

17

R2823

C3011

Q6202 Q6201

C6562

R3007

C3038

C6210
Q3002
R5812 D5804 R5809
R5810 D5803 R5808
C5826

AA21

C2800

B2800

W818

W816

W815

L3001

C5803

C3031 C3027
R3018 R3016
R3009
C3056

C3039

Q3001

C6561

NR2810

C2848
C2919
C2922
C2901
C2875
C2884 C2887
C2885 C2890
C2894
C2942
C2900
C2904 C2898
C2902
C2896
C2917
C2909 C2913
C2941
R2809
C2949
C5853 C5852
C2912
C2926
C2957
R2802
C2927

C5830

B6552

A21

C2868

IC3007
R2837

C2880

R2835

C3015

R3005

B4301

C2948

W826
C2933
C2944
C2936
C2947
C2918
AA1

C3026

W881
R2842
R2841
R2874 R2801

C5825

W848
C2929

W804
W802

Q3005

R2900
C2925
C2940

C3029 C3024

C6556 C6560
C6557

D6205
C5823
R5813 C5824
C5818

C2932
C2931

B5801

C2937

A1

C2858
C2856

C5835
C5834
C5833

X2802
NR2811

NR2805

C5838
C5837

C2921

IC6552

CP3001

C2821
R2818 R2819

C5839

X2801

C2816
C2814

C5840

R2806

IC3003

C5841
C5806

C5804

C2905

Q3009

B5803

R4307
R6561 R6562
R6559 R6558

B3008

B2822
B2817
B2816
W849
B2815

R3010
C2946
C2939

B6556

Q5801

C3004
R3002
C2924

IC6553

C6553

Q5802

C2914

L3005

C6569

C6584

R5811
C5827

L5801

IC5801

C5814
C5805

C3013

IC6557

W817

R3038

R3039

CP2804

C3012

9
25
R5803

R6584

CP3002

IC6551

1
R5804

R6501
R6502

NR6551

R6217

C6571

C2968

R6204

C6570

R2856

W878

C5812 C5811

W863
W865

B4302
C4306
R4310

L3004

C3043

IC6558

C6580

C3022

C4304

W840

C6568

C5809
R5801
R5802

C4303
C4302

J4301
R4309

D3402

C6579

R6210

Q4301
R4302

C6564

R6581

C6581

IC6202

R6203 C6209

D3403

R6590
R6582

CP4301

W847

C6218

R6236

C6215 C6213

R4301
R4306 C4301

IC6556

R6551
R6552

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DIGITAL (TOP SIDE)

C5846
L5805

CP6201

W807
CD6203

DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)

L3002

C6576

C6575

B3005

C6554

Q3003 Q3004

B3017

G-4

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (INSERTED PARTS)

SW

SOLDER SIDE

R509

B501

GR

BR
YE

CD2301

CD301
W824

J8101
W002

R309

R308
J301
SW2204

SW2208

CEH422A

SW2207

SW2205

W823

W820

C309

C310

W830

W006

W007

C311

C304

W004 W845

W832
CP2201

CP501

J8104

CP8101

SW2206

C511

W803

R505
D526

R511
R549
R501
R521

W835
L503

HS301

W833
C307

SW2201

CD502

C535_1

W822

R8110

W012

W017
L504

W008

IC301

J8103

W827

T501

IC501

IC502

W011

W018

W828

03
R5

W807

W806

C512

CEH423A

SH501

C516

D523
W840

OS7601
CP7601

J8102

IC505

C522

G-5

C513

C517
W010

W019

C7602

C508

C7017

R7038

W015

R518
R529

D512
D511

C504

D7601_1

Q501

C518

HS502_1

D515

R512

D516

D517

HS501_1
R508

Q503

C520

CEH421A

W808

R510

D514

D7015

W809

W025

W026

W819

W024

D7006 W014

D7003

R7036

C525

R7014

W022

R7035

W021

R7047

R7033

L501

D508

SW2202

R7039

D7008

M2602 M2601

W810

W023

D7005

R7011

C502

C7033

D7007

C7018

D7002
D7004

W001

D510

D7001

J501

C507

DED020A

D504

C510

D507

C506

R504

F501

AS MARKED.
- REPLACE
RISK OF FIRE

WH

TH501

T7001
C7030

FH501

D518

C514

W013

FH502

D505

CD7005

SW2

SOLDER SIDE

SW2203

G-6

G-7
C7032

Q7001

R506
R7015 R7016

R517
C526
R524
R523

R515

Q505

R519

CEH421A

Q504

D7020 D7019

Q7002
IC7001

Q7003

Q7005

CEH423A
R7602

R2202
R2201
R2205
R2204

R7001

R7603_1

R302

C319

C320

R7023
R531
R7032 R7030
C7001
R7002
R7009 R7005 C7011 R7003
R535
R7012
C7012
R538
R7019 D520 D519
C7004
C7024
C7010
C545 C538
R7010
R7041 C7013 R7007
R7020
C546
C531
R7054 R7021
R7008
D522
C7035R7056 R7013
R7017
C539 D521
C7008
C7003
C7015
R543
C7002C7009
R7034
R7004
R7026
R533
R7025 C7007 R7018
R536
R7006
R7048
C543_1
D7011
R7604_1

R525

D7010
C7006
C7021
R7040 R7042
C7019

R7024

F7001

R7044

C7026

C7022

Q7004

D7023
R7045 R7049
D7014 D7017
C7031

C521

C505 C501

C503
D509
C509

R502

R513

D506

R306
R307

C308

CEH422A

R305
R304

C301

C306

C305

C303

R8115
C8108
R8106

R8116

R311
R310

R2206

R507

R8107

R8111
R8112
C8109

C8104
R8117

R2203

D7013 D7018
R7046
D7024 R7050

R544
R545
R546
R547

R8114

C8107
R8113
R8104

R8118

C8110

R8108

C8103

R8119 C8105
R8105

R8120 R8103 C8111
C8102

C8106

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)
SOLDER SIDE

R7605

IC503

C7020

D7012

R7043
R7022
IC7002

G-8

A

B

C

D

E

F

C4038

JG001

0.01 B

JG002

RF

OPU_B
OPU_A

OPU_F
SPDL_SENS+
OPU_E
SPDL_SENSOPU_D
OPU_C

C4085 0.001 B

54 RAMADD(8)

102 APWM5+/GPIO(16)

112 GPIO(24)/AOUT(2)/APWM2-

55 RAMADD(10)

103 APWM5-/GPIO(17)

113 GPIO(25)/APWM1+

56 VDDP

104 AIN/SPDIFIN/GPIO(18)
105 VDDAPWM
106 GPIO(19)/PWMCO(5)/APWM4+

104PIN FPCSTRB

107 GPIO(20)/APWM4-

FOR PLAYER

108 GPIO(21)/APWM3+

109 GPIO(22)/AOUT(3)/APWM3-

94PIN STBY_L
FOR PLAYER

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
NC NC NC NC
NC
NC NC NC
0.1 F
C4025

4.7K

0.1 F
C4024

R4014

0.1 F
C4023

0.1 F

47
0.01 B
R4008
C4022

C4020

0.1 F
C4019

C4029 100P CH

0.1 F

BOOTSEL2

4.7K
R4045

DAC_VIDEO_C/D
W807

75 +-1%

75 +-1%
R4002

75 +-1%
R4003

75 +-1%
R4004

C4028
4.7K
4.7K

1M

R4012

X’tal frequrcy

C4035 27P CH

0.1 F
C4051

0.1 F

C4027

C4079

0.001 B

C4091

100P CH

C4044
R4016 100

RESET

100P CH

D4002
D4003

0.01 B
C4005

IRRCV

W807

W836 adjust

DUPRD1
DUPTD1
DUPRD0
DUPTD0

MA111
MA111

R4067 10K

TIN
C4096 0.001 B

(DVD-L/CD-H)
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
(MUTE-L)

B4010

C4011 100P CH

C4032 0.001 B

C4037 100P CH

C4081

R4071

DVD_CD
DRVSB
TOUT_SW
TRAY_CLOSE
TRAY_OPEN

0.1 F

(A_GND)
(D_GND)

HOME
SPDIF

150

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

4
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

54
C4012
0.01 B
APWM_LAPWM_L+
APWM_RAPWM_R+

GND
GND
SYS_MUTE
DAC_VIDEO_A
DAC_VIDEO_C/D
RESET
SPDIF
DUPRD1
DUPTD1
APWM_L+
APWM_LAPWM_R+
APWM_RP.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+5V_D
P.CON+1.8V_D

3

0.1 F

B4006 (250mA)
EBMS160808A102_RDC45

2

W841

(D_GND)

PCB130
DMG097

SYS_MUTE

RAMCKE

SD_D14
SD_D1
SD_D15
SD_D0

SD_D13
SD_D2

SD_D10
SD_D5
SD_D11
SD_D4
SD_D12
SD_D3

SD_D8
SD_D7
SD_D9
SD_D6

RAMCLK

RAMWE#
RAMDQM

SD_A9
SD_A11
RAMCS0#
SD_BA0
RAMCS1#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#

SD_A0
SD_A8
SD_A10

53

1

1
DEBUG MODE DEL

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-1

5

56P CH

C4053
0.001 B

B4015

C4026

6

JG029

68P CH

R4078
R4089

Y/C

(A_GND)

0.1 F
C4076

6.3V 47
SJV

52

YUV W806

(D_GND)

0.1 F
C4072

75 +-1%
R4005

C4034 27P CH
X4001
100GT02727
27MHz

VDDPWM3.3V
TIN_SW
TRAY_OPEN
TRAY_CLOSE
GND
GND
HOME
TOUT_SW
DVD_CD
DRVSB
RF
OPU_A
OPU_B
OPU_C
OPU_D
OPU_E
OPU_F
VC
SPDL_SENSSPDL_SENS+
MD_DVD
MD_CD
DVD_LD
CD_LD
SPINDLE_PWM
SLED_PWM
TRACK_PWM
FOCUS_PWM

MA111
(RF_GND)
(D_GND)

68P CH

0.1 F
C4021

R4086

W836

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE
P.CON+3.3V_D
TIN
D4008

68P CH

0.1 F
C4075
C4069

(21mA)
EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (130mA)

C4054

101 APWM6-/GPIO(15)

B4005

C4052

53 RAMADD(0)

111 IGPIO(23)/APWM2+

EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (185mA)
EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (120mA)

6.3V 100 SJV

110 GNDAPWM

B4002
B4003

DAC_VIDEO_D
DAC_VIDEO_A

0.1 F
C4083

100 APWM6+/GPIO(14)

BOOTSEL1

1K

0.01 B
0.001 B
RFINN
RFINP

5V TOLERANT

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC
IC4001
ZR36966ELCG-D-G

0
0

R4054
1K
R4053

C4006
C4086

C4058 0.001 B

202 MEMCS0#

0.1 F
390 +-1%

C4007
R4001

C4049

390 +-1%
0.1 F

C4055
B4016
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
R4043
R4022 15K+-1% C4004

0.001 B

R4019
4.7K
TACT_OFFSET
FACT_OFFSET
R4018 4.7K

C4057 180P CH
C4001 0.0039 B

0.027 B
SGND

(I2CDAT)
(I2CCLK)

(P-H/I-L)
(MD)
(MC)
(ML)

(D1_2)
(D1_1)

MEMADD(0)
GPIO(63)/MEMCS2#
GPIO(62)/FCU_IORD#
GPIO(61)/FCU_IOWR#
GPIO(60)/FCU_SCLK
GPIO(59)/FCU_CS2#
GPIO(58)/FCU_CS3#
GPIO(57)/FCU_WAIT#
GPIO(56)/FCU_RST
IGPIO(55)/FCU_IRQ
GNDC
VDDC
IGPIO(54)/PWMCO(5)
GPIO(53)/PWMCO(4)
GPIO(52)/PWMCO(3)
GPIO(51)/PWMCO(2)
GNDPWM
GPIO(50)/PWMCO(1)
VDDPWM
GPIO(49)/PWMCO(0)
DVD_LD
CD_LD
DVD_MD
CD_MD
VDDSAFE
GNDREF
RESLOAD
VREF
VC
GND1AFE
H
G
GNDAFE
F
K
E
J
D
C
VDDAFE
B
203 MEMRD#

C4082

C4013 0.1 F

204 MEMDAT(0)

6.3V 220 SJV

SD_A2
SD_A6
SD_A1
SD_A7

157 RFP

205 GPIO(8)/MEMDAT(8)

7

0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F

158 RFN

0
1.3
1.3
3.3
1.2
1.2
3.3
1.1
0
1.1
1.4
1.6 R4042 100
1.8
0
3.3
0
1.8
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
R4052 4.7K
3.3
3.3 R4065 4.7K
3.3 R4087 4.7K
3.3 R4032 4.7K
0
0
3.3
3.3
0
0
3.3
3.3 R4024 4.7K
1.6
IABCLK
0
NC
IALRCLK
0 NC
3.3
IAMCLK
0
NC
0
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
0
NC
0
NC
0
0NC
3.3
NC
0
NC
0NC
R4009
3.3
33

C4042

SD_A4
SD_A3
SD_A5

0 NC
0 NC
0
1.6
1.6
1.6
3.3
0
0.7
1.6
1.2
1.6
1.8

B4001 (10mA)
EBMS160808A102_RDC45

C4030

0.1 F

206 MEMDAT(1)

105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156

C4014
HA2
HA1
HA19

159 VDD1AFE

0
0
0

HA5
HA4
HA3

160 A

207 GPIO(9)/MEMDAT(9)

3.3

MEMCS0
RD
WR
SD_A0
SD_A1
SD_A2
SD_A3
SD_A4
SD_A5
SD_A6
SD_A7
SD_A8
SD_A9
SD_A10
SD_A11
SD_D0
SD_D1
SD_D2
SD_D3
SD_D4
SD_D5
SD_D6
SD_D7
SD_D8
SD_D9
SD_D10
SD_D11
SD_D12
SD_D13
SD_D14
SD_D15
RAMCS0#
RAMCS1#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
SD_BA0
RAMDQM
RAMWE#
RAMCLK
RAMCKE

208 VDDP

GNDDACBS2
RSET
DAC1
VDDDAC
DAC2
DAC3
VDDDAC
DAC4
GNDDAC_D
DAC5
XIN
XO
VDDPLL
GNDPLL
RESET#
GNDC
VDDC
GPIO(48)/DUPRD1
GPIO(47)/DUPTD1
GPIO(46)/DUPRD0
GPIO(45)/PWMCO(5)/DUPTD0
VDDP
IGPIO(44)
GPIO(43)/TDO SSCTXD
GPIO(42)/TCK SSCCLK
GPIO(41)/TDI/NMI SSCRXD
GPIO(40)
GPIO(39)
GPIO(38)
IGPIO(37)/TMS/NMI
GPIO(36)
GPIO(35)
GPIO(34)/RAMCKE/SPDIFIN
GPIO(33)/AIN/SPDIFIN
GPIO(32)/SPDIFO
GPIO(31)/ABCLK
GPIO(30)/ALRCLK
VDDP
GPIO(29)/AMCLK
GNDC
GPIO(28)/AOUT(0)/APWM0GPIO(27)/APWM0+
GPIO(26)/AOUT(1)/APWM1-

0
0

NC

HA15
HA14
HA13
HA12
HA11
HA10
HA9
HA8
WR
HA18
HA17
HA7
HA6

HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD7
HD8
HD9
HD10
HD11
HD12
HD13
HD14
HD15

MEMDAT(2)
MEMDAT(10)/GPIO(0)
MEMDAT(3)
MEMDAT(11)/GPIO(1)
MEMDAT(4)
MEMDAT(12)/GPIO(2)
MEMDAT(5)
MEMDAT(13)/GPIO(3)
MEMDAT(6)
MEMDAT(14)/GPIO(4)
GNDC
MEMDAT(7)
MEMDAT(15)
VDDC
VDDP
MEMADD(16)
MEMCS1#/GPIO(5)
MEMADD(15)
MEMADD(14)
MEMADD(13)
MEMADD(12)
MEMADD(11)
MEMADD(10)
MEMADD(9)
MEMADD(8)
MEMWR#
MEMADD(18)/GPIO(6)
MEMADD(17)
MEMADD(7)
MEMADD(6)
GNDC
MEMADD(5)
MEMADD(4)
MEMADD(3)
VDDP
MEMADD(2)
MEMADD(1)
MEMADD(19)/IGPIO(7)
USBVDD
USBDP/GPO(67)
USBDN/GPO(68)
USBGND
RAMADD(4)
RAMADD(3)
RAMADD(5)
VDDIP
GNDC
RAMADD(2)
RAMADD(6)
RAMADD(1)
RAMADD(7)
VDDC
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

TP4010

HA16

VDDDAC
VDDAFERF

+1.8V
+3.3V

GNDC
RAMADD(9)
RAMADD(11)/GPO(64)
RAMCS0#
RAMBA
RAMCS1#/GPO(65)
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
VDDP
GNDC
RAMWE#
RAMDQM
GNDPCLK
PCLK
VDDPCLK
RAMDAT(8)
RAMDAT(7)
RAMDAT(9)
RAMDAT(6)
VDDP
GNDC
RAMDAT(10)
RAMDAT(5)
RAMDAT(11)
RAMDAT(4)
RAMDAT(12)
RAMDAT(3)
VDDP
GNDC
RAMDAT(13)
RAMDAT(2)
VDDC
RAMDAT(14)
RAMDAT(1)
RAMDAT(15)
RAMDAT(0)
VDDP
RAMDQM2/RAMCKE/GPO(66)
GNDC
RAMCKE/SDI_PSC/GPIO(10)
GPAIO/IGPIO(11)
APWM7+/GPIO(12)
APWM7-/GPIO(13)

C4008 0.1 F
C4010 0.1 F

(RF_GND)
(A_GND)

208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157

52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

HD7
HD15

2.4
2.4
2.2
2.2
1.7
2.0
2.2
1.2
1.9
1.5
0
2.5
1.9
1.8
3.3
2.5
3.3
0.7
0.6
0.6
1.0
2.5
0.7
1.0
2.4
3.3
0
2.8
1.7
0
0
1.7
1.7
1.7
3.3
1.0
2.6
0
3.3

C4018

2

HD2
HD10
HD3
HD11
HD4
HD12
HD5
HD13
HD6
HD14

(D_GND)
(AFEGND)

1.0
0
0
3.3
0
0
0
3.3
0
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
0
3.3
1.9
0
0.5
3.3
1.8
1.3
1.2
1.2
3.3
0
1.0
1.2
2.3
1.7
1.8
2.2
3.3
0
1.7
0.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.3
3.3
3.3
0
1.0

3

+3.3V
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA3
HA4
HA5
HA6
HA7
HA8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA15
HA16
HA17
HA18
HA19

C4077 0.1 F

4

3.3
1.9
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.9
2.9
2.4

FROM/TO MEMORY

5

(DVD MT PCB)
8

NC 0
NC 0
0
NC
0 NC
3.3
0
NC
0
NC
0
NC
0
NC
0
1.8
0
NC
0
NC
1.7
1.0
0
1.6
3.3
1.8
2.4
3.3
0
0
3.3
0
0.9
1.7
2.1
0
0
0
0
2.1
2.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3
3.3
2.3
2.3
3.3
1.6
1.6

HD9
HD1
HD8
HD0
RD
MEMCS0
HA0

V_SW

R4038
R4039

R4037

C4105

R4036

4.7K

39K
0.1 F
15K
560P CH

C4015

R4023

R4062
C4002
R4063
C4059

0.1 F

4.7K

4.7K

P.CON+5V_D
4.7K

JG009
4.7K

DUPRD0
10P CH

DUPTD0

JG008

C4003

C4056 0.027 B

DUPRD1

JG007

0.1 F

MA111

DUPTD1

C4033

D4005

JG006

11K
11K

BOOT1

JG005

R4060
R4061

BOOT2

JG004

6

H

VDDPWM

JG003

7

VC

TRACK_PWM

SLED_PWM
SPINDLE_PWM

8

FOCUS_PWM
DVD_LD
CD_LD
(VR_CD)MD_DVD
(VR_DVD) MD_CD

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

G

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

RELEASE MODE ADD

D

E

F

G

H

H-2

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DVD MT PCB)

8

8

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

1.5

HD0

1.5
2.9

RD

0
2.9

HA0

2.4
R4040

MEMCS0

A7

DQ8

A6

DQ0

A5

DE#

A4

VSS

A3

CE#

A2

A0

A1

15

W860

R4048

3.3

4.7K
SD_A11

0
NC
0

SD_A9

0

55

HA19

0

HA18

2.8

HA17

1.7

HA7

0

HA6

1.7

HA5

1.7

HA4

1.7

HA3

1.0

HA2

2.6

HA1

SD_A8

0

SD_A7

1.6

SD_A6

1.6

SD_A5

1.6

SD_A4

1.6
0

NC
UDQM
CLK

CAS

CKE

RAS

NC

CS

A11

BA0

A9

BA1

A8

A10/AP

A7

A0

LDQM
WE

A6

A1

A5

A2

A4

A3

VSS

VDD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11

10

0.1 F

12

VDD

1.2

13

DQ7

VSS

VSSQ

C4045

14

DQ8

3.3

15

54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
42

44
43

VDDQ

41

DQ6

1.7

16

0.5

DQ9

2.2

17

RAMCLK

DQ5

0

18

0.1 F

VDDQ

DQ10

0.8

19

RAMDQM

0
NC
1.8

VSSQ

1.2

20

C4039

DQ4

0.01 B

3.3

21

DQ1

0

DQ11

C4050

1.3

22

A17

1.8

DQ3

C4036
0.001 B

3.3

23

DQ9

0.01 B

RESET

VSSQ

DQ12

40

A18

SD_D8

3.3

VDDQ

39

330P CH

C4041

DQ2

38

DQ2

16

A19

1.2

DQ13

37

C4060

0
DQ10

SD_D9
WR

14

WP#

1.0

DQ1

36

3.3

SD_D10

DQ14

35

0
NC

3.3
DQ3

0

HA19

13

VPP

2.3

SD_D11

3.3
DQ11

1.8

HA8

12

RP#

3.3

VDDQ

34

2.4

C4040
0.01 B

DQ0

VSSQ

33

SD_D12

0
VDD

1.7

HA9

9
10
11

WE#

1.2

SD_D13

DQ15

32

4
5
6
7
8

46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38

DQ4

SD_D14

VDD

31

HD8

1.0

0

VSS

30

1.5

A20

1.2

SD_D15

29

HD1

HA12

28

1.9

DQ12

17

HD9

A19

18

2.4

HD2

DQ5

19

2.4

HD10

HA10

20

2.2

HD3

0.7

21

2.2

HD11

A8

HA11

22

HA0
HA1
HA2
HA3
HA4
HA5
HA6
HA7
HA8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA15
HA16
HA17
HA18
HA19
HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD7
HD8
HD9
HD10
HD11
HD12
HD13
HD14
HD15
MEMCS0
RD
WR
+3.3V

DQ13

2.5

23

0.1 F

A9

1.0

24

3.3

37

1.7

HD4

36

2.0

35

HD12

DQ6

64M SDRAM IC
IC4005
M12L64164A-7TG
0

24

HA13

0

34

2.2

33

HD5

A10

32

1.2

HD13

DQ14

31

1.9

HD6

A11

30

1.5

DQ7

29

HD14

A12

28

2.5

DQ15

27

HD7

A13

26

1.9

HD15

VSS

25

HA14

0.6

26

48

HA15

0.6

27

A14

25

0

C4062

3

VCCQ

0.7

0.1 F

5

4

A15

1

3.3

A16

2

C4064

47

2.5

HA16

7

16M

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

SD_D0

SD_D1

6

SD_D2

SD_D3
SD_D4

1.2

SD_D5
SD_D6

0
1.3

SD_D7

3.3

C4046

1.9

0.1 F

RAMDQM

3.3

RAMWE#

3.3

RAMCAS#

3.3

RAMRAS#

3.3

RAMCS1#

0

SD_BA0

3.3

RAMCS0#

0

SD_A10

1.0

SD_A0

1.2

SD_A1

0.7

SD_A2

1.6

5

4

SD_A3
C4047

3.3

0.1 F

RAMCKE

3

4.7K

6

FLASH IC
IC4007

3

SD_A0
SD_A1
SD_A2
SD_A3
SD_A4
SD_A5
SD_A6
SD_A7
SD_A8
SD_A9
SD_A10
SD_A11
SD_D0
SD_D1
SD_D2
SD_D3
SD_D4
SD_D5
SD_D6
SD_D7
SD_D8
SD_D9
SD_D10
SD_D11
SD_D12
SD_D13
SD_D14
SD_D15
RAMCS0#
RAMCS1#
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
SD_BA0
RAMDQM
RAMWE#
RAMCLK
RAMCKE

7

GND

C4009

1 B

C4095

0.01 B

C4099

RESET
P.CON+3.3V_D

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

D_GND

6.3V 220 SJV

B4008
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

2

2

PCB130
DMG097

1

1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-3

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

D

E

F

G

H

H-4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DVD MT PCB)

DSM2(06SD)

C2350

C2328

0.1 B

6.3V 22 SJV
C2348

8

CD_LD

DVD_LD

MD_CD
(VR_DVD)

MD_DVD
(VR_CD)

33

R2360

VC

DVD_CD

8

0.1 B

C2329
FROM/TO LOADER

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

6.3V 22 SJV

27K
7
2.7

9
2.6

10K

390

R2336
11
0

12
0

13
3.7

14
1.7

16
2.7

18

3.3K

R2335

19
6.0

R2327

4.7K

10K

4

TP2316
1K

NC

21
1.6

R2337

23

VIN2+

20
1.6

0 NC
24

VIN1+A

17
0 NC 6.0

1.6
25

VIN 1

1.6
26

VIN2-

27

VIN1-A

0 NC 1.8
28

VIN3

15
2.6

1.6
29

VO_OP

30

VIN2

0 NC 1.6

VIN-OP

VIN+OP

NC

10
2.8

REG-IN

REG-OUT

VREF-OUT

8

2.6

31

TP2317

6
1.9

0

32

22
1.6

R2325

C2365 0.1 B

R2302 100 +-1%

16V100 SJV

120

0.1 B

0.1 B

2.2

C2307

C2305

R2304

R2358

MA111

0.1 B

1K
MA111

C2303

R2357

D2303

2.2

0.022 B

0.1 B

C2304

C2302
R2303

R2323
MOT_SLED-

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

FO-

FO+

TR-

1.2

JG057

TR+

MOT_LD+

MOT_LD-

TRAY_CLOSE

0.1 F
C2306

C2315

4.7K

0.1 F

2
TRAY_OPEN

3

R2328
C2310

TP2313

C2360

TP2301

100P CH
C2359

100P CH

C2358

6.8K

100P CH

C2357

C2319

100P CH

5

0

33

1.2

MOT_SPDL+

4
0 NC 1.9

6.0

34

VD1+

SP1+

3

2
0

0 NC 0 NC
35

TIN_SW
P.CON+A5V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D
GND
P.CON+6V_D
M_GND

2

JG058

MOT_SLED+

1

1
0

36

VD1-

MOT_SPDL-

0 NC 1.6
37

VD2-

SP1-

MOT_SLED-

1.6
38

TP2315

MOT_SLED+

2

100

39

VD2+

SLD+

0 NC 1.6
40

TP2314

SLD-

3

HOME

1.6
41

PGND1

4

R2349

3.2
42

PGND2

(D_GND)

SW(GND)
LIMIT SW

3.2
43

VD3-

TP2306

4.1
44

VD3+

6.8
B2305

5

0

VREF-IN

R2341

4.7K

VD4-

MOT_LD+

5

(D_GND)

R2338

TP2308

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

6

4.7K

VIN4

R2340

6

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

220

6.8
JG019

R2305

3.0

MOT_LD-

P.CON+3.3V_D

4.7K

R2342

4

CD LD CTL
Q2302
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P 3.2

R2333

VD4+

4.7K

R2350

LD+

100P CH

1

C2321

100
100P CH

R2353

LD-

C2339

GND(D)

2

0

VC2
R2320

NC

10P CH
TOUT_SW

6.3V 47 SJV

7

4.7K

VLD+

100

TIN_SW
C2330

3

CP2303
04_6232_106_015_800+

R2310

R2321

C2341

TP2304

C2301

OPEN

4.7K

100P CH

CLOSE

4

R2313
TP2307

CDLD
R2352

R2334

220
C2340
6.3V 47 SJV

TP2303

5

6.8
R2332

5.6K
TP2318

1.9

R2326

2.6

2.3

DVDLD

CP2302
04_6232_105_015_800+

1.2K

VCCS

TP2312

NC

TP2311

FO-

VCC1

FO+

F RTN

33K

F DRV

24

R2319

23

VC
DVD_CD
DVD_LD
CD_LD
RF
GND
GND
OPU_A
OPU_B
OPU_C
OPU_D
OPU_E
OPU_F
HOME
TOUT_SW
TIN_SW
MD_DVD
MD_CD
VDDPWM3.3V
DRVSB
SPINDLE_PWM
FOCUS_PWM
TRACK_PWM
TRAY_CLOSE
TRAY_OPEN
SLED_PWM
SPDL_SENS+
SPDL_SENS-

R2339

6.8
R2318
DVD LD CTL
Q2301
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

15K
TP2319

TP2310

VIN3-

TR-

NC

TP2309

T RTN

R2309

TR+

22

NC

100 +-1%

T DRV

75K

NC

21

R2307

20

1K

R2306

R2324

JG018

TP2320

JG017
JG056

VIN4-

GND

FOCUS_PWM
TRACK_PWM

VLD-

19

DVDLD

1K

LD(DVD)

CDLD

JG036
JG037

MUTE234

18

JG035

NC

PD/GND

R2301

LD(CD)

17

TP2322

16

R2329

JG034

TP2305

3

P.CON+3.3V_D

0.1 F

GND

P.CON+A5V_D

W813

10K

VR(CD)

15

DVD/VR

MUTE1

14

W803

RF_A5V
W812

VCC2

VR COM

OPU_A

JG027

R2308

13

JG010

VCONT

VR(DVD)

OPU_B

REV

12

RF

JG011

TP2302

A

JG016

0.1 F

11

DVD_CD

S-GND

B

OPU_C

JG025

R2330

VRF(RF_OUT)

OPU_D

JG040

D2304

9
10

JG013

(RF_GND)
(D_GND)

C2316

SW1(DVD/CD)

OPU_E

6.3V 47 SJV

8

JG014

FWD

C

(RF_GND)
(D_GND)

JG026

C2326

D

7

3.3K

6

R2355

E

OPU_VREF

0.1 B

VCC

5

OPU_F

JG012

C2323

4

JG015

0.1 F

Vref

C2317

F

3

MOTOR DRIVE IC
IC2301
LA6565VR-TLM-E

5

2

C2331 0.1 B

0.1 F

6

CP2301_1
LD07T2-24ND-03
1
GND

C2309

7

PCB130
DMG097

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

1

ARE

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

A

H-5

B

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

C

D

E

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

F

G

1

H

H-6

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DVD MT PCB)

8

8

FROM/TO REGULATOR
CP8502 (CP3002)
A2001WV2-8P

C8518

6

GND

5

P.CON+12V

4

P.CON+3.3V

3

P.CON+3.3V

2

GND

1

C8539

0.1 B

C8521

0.001 B

C8519

C8503

C8506

1uHNLV25

0.001 B

16V100 SJV

0.1 B

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

59

7

B8503

P.CON+3.3V_D

BLM18PG121SN1D

6

(A_GND)
(D_GND)

C8538

0.001 B

ADJ OUT
IN
1
2
3
0.6
1.8
3.2

2.2 B

C8520

1.8V REG IC
IC8502
LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

68 +-1%
C8516

6.3V 100 SJV

C8512

150P CH

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

R8508

DAC_A[Y]_VIDEO
58

2.2K +-1%
R8509

W804

(D_GND)

C8501

DAC_VIDEO_A

P.CON+3.3V_D

1K +-1%

P.CON+1.8V_D

RESET
GND

B8502

0.001 B

12P CH
L8502

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

L

P.CON+A5V_D

FROM/TO MEMORY

5

C8517

C8515
DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO

7

P.CON+A5V
B8504

P.CON+5V_D

150P CH

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

C8504

DAC_VIDEO_C/D
DAC_VIDEO_A
RESET
SYS_MUTE
DUPRD1
SPDIF
DUPTD1
APWM_L+
APWM_LAPWM_R+
APWM_RP.CON+1.8V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+5V_D
GND
GND

C8505

8

BLM18PG121SN1D

0.1 B

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

1 F
R8507

6

M_GND

150P CH

7

GND(M)
P.CON+6V

B8501

P.CON+6V_D

5

P.CON+A5V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+6V_D
M_GND
TIN_SW
GND

(D_GND)
FROM/TO REGULATOR

R8532
R8530

47K

2.2K

4
R8521

APWM_L+

R8534
15K

DUPTD1

W825

DUPRD1

W824

CP8501 (CP3002)
A2001WR-14A

W818
TIN_SW

16V47 SJV

C8513

C8532
47P CH

47K

R8506
220

0.0012 B

R8517

C8530

APWM_L-

47K

C8534

R8539

56

SSCRXD/TX

14

SSCTXD/RX

13

GND
START_SW

12
11

[U]C_VIDEO

10

[V]Y_VIDEO

9

[Y]_VIDEO

8

DVD RESET

7

RESET

4

DVD_A_OUT_L 6

1
+
VCC

SPDIF

47K

R8529
2.2K

C8531
47P CH
R8531

3

GND

2

SPDIF-134

1

3

R8533

C8541

0.01 B

C8543

0.01 B

560P CH

C8536

C8537

57

10K

47K

1K
R8535

R8536

16V10 SJV

0.0012 B

C8533

C8529

R8522

R8523

APWM_R-

2

ZERO

C8526
0.1 B

APWM_R+

5

8
10.9

560P CH

7
6.9

MA111

0.01 B

6
4.3

SYS_MUTE

C8542

5
4.3

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R 4

D8510

10K

2

R8537

3

1K

6.9

+
-

150P CH

47K
C8527

R8527

10K

R8516

3

4.3

AUDIO_AMP IC
IC8501
NJM4565M(TE1)

4

A_GND

150P CH

47K
C8528

0.1 B
R8528

C8514

C8525

16V47 SJV

24K

R8510

16V10 SJV
4.3

0

15K

2

47K

PCB130
DMG097

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1

A

H-7

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

D

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

E

1

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

F

G

H

H-8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

8

7

7

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
3.3

MCU_SCITXD

SW
Q6201
2SK3019_TL

3.3

3.3

S

D

3.3

G

G

S

D

3.3

3.3

MCU_SCIRXD

SW
Q6202
2SK3019_TL

I2C_DATA
I2C_CLK

W863

6

W865

TO AV SWITCH

6

RESET_N
SUB MICON
CP6201 A2001WV2-9P
TX
1

2.5

4.7K

4

0

1

2

3

4.7K

R6219
0.1 B

C6210

4.7K

14

15

16

DVD_SCL

DVD_SDA

VREF

3.3V_POWER_H

AVSS

DVD_CS

IIC_OFF
ASEMD0

3.3

13
12

NC
3.3
R6227

3.3
3.3

R6223

100

FROM/TO REGULATOR

100

0

3.3V_POWER_H

R6228

KEY_A

4.7K
R6224

4.7K

4

DVD_RESET

KEY_B
AT+5.8V
POWER_FAIL
SYS_POWER_H
START_SW
AT+3.3V
GND

10K

18P CH

C6213

3

D5.0V

1
16MHz
100GT01615

0

C6215

3.3

D5.0V

AT+3.3V

STBY-H

0.01 B
C6205

4V100 V-S

2

IR_REMO

2

C6216

STBY-H

0

0.1 B

3.3

4.7K

LV_CTL

D6205

0

R6236

5
6
7
8
0 2.8 3.3 3.3

MA111

SW
Q6204
KRC102SRTK

RESET_N
W807

20P CH

3.3

SW
Q6203
KRA103SRTK

0

1 MAIN_MICON_RXD EEPROM_SCL

2
3
4
0 3.3 3.1

C6212

REMOCON IN

GND

R6216

GND

1

AT+3.3V

EEPROM_SDA

8 REMOCON_IN

X6201

AT+3.3V

2

3.3

IN

2.2 B
(1608)

3

STANDBY LED

3.3

B

4.7K
R6225

10K

4

POWER ON LED

OUT

C6209

5

R6203

NC

0.1

3.3

4.7K

R6204

3

C6221

CD6203 (CP7601)
E8252002

0.1 B

IR_REMO

4

NC

DVD_RESET

SYS_POWER_H

9 DISC_IN_DET

4.7K

FROM/TO REMOCON

NC

0

5

AUDIO_MUTE

R6217

D5.0V

0

NC

15 ASEMD0

EXT_MUTE

SUB MICON IC
1
IC6202
3.3
R5F21124FP
R6213

RESET IC
IC6201
PST3229NR

3.3

32 MAIN_MICON_TXD DVD_POWER

11

4.7K

3.3

FROM/TO FLASH

25 KEY_A

10

3.3

C6218

9

R6210

MODE

STBY-H

VCC

R6206

3.3

NC

XIN

33K

DTV_RESET

VSS

R6205

0 NC 0 NC
18
17

XOUT

3.3

0 3.3 3.3
21
20
19

RESET

3.3

IVCC

3.3

5

3.3 2.8 3.3
24
23
22

CNVSS

NC

KEY_B

RESET

4.7K

9

NC

R6215

GND
NC

4.7K

RESET

8

25

7

RX

26

CNVSS

27

RX

6

28

5

5

29

4

AUDIO_MUTE

30

VCC
CNVSS

TO JACK

AT+3.3V

31

3

TX
MODE

32

MODE

R6214

2

ACCESSORY
BT001
MNAAA(R03)

PCBDH0
CEH420

BT002
MNAAA(R03)
TM101
000-103000530
P201-2476-2
CD501
P201-2476-2

1

A

H-9

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

B

C

1

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

D

E

F

G

H

H-10

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8
SCALER IC

IC2801

8

R8J66954BG

R2900
J1 PCVIN
C2925
FROM/TO JACK

C2946

AV3/AV4_Y
AV1_CVBS
AV3/AV4_PB

0.1 B

SW_Y_IN

C2937

0.1 B

TU_CVBS

C2939

0.1 B

AV1_CVBS

C2938

0.1 B

AV3/AV4_Y

C2931

0.1 B

K1 SSIN1
1.6

2

0.8
1.1

3

1.2

AV3/AV4_PR
C2940

SPDIF

0.1 B

0
4

C2941

1.7

0.1 B

0

FROM/TO TUNER
TU_CVBS

SW_C_IN

C2932

5

0.1 B

2.0

I2C_CLK
NC

I2C_DATA

6
FROM SCALER POWER
AD_A3.3V

AV3/AV4_PB

C2934

C2926

0.1 B

C2942

0.1 B

0

C2933

0.1 B

0

C2943

0.1 B

C2944

FROM/TO AV SWITCH
AV3/AV4_PR

SW_Y_IN

C2945

0.1 B

C2927

0.1 B

C2936

0.1 B

1.9

0.3
0.2

L2 VIN1A

7

L3 VIN2A
M1 VREFA
M2 VIN4A
M3 VRPA

N1 VIN2B
TO JACK

N2 VIN6A

R2872

100K

R2873

100K

LOUT_FI
ROUT_FI

N4 VRMA

P2 VREFB
TO AV SWITCH

P3 VIN3B

R1 VREFC
R2 VRMB
R3 VIN4B

ROUT
FROM/TO FLASH
LOUT

T1 VRPC

1.6

DVD-H
ASW0
ASW2

DVD-H

IIC_OFF
I2C_CLK
I2C_DATA

T2 VIN2C

7
0.1 B

C2957

0.1 B

LRCK
AD_A3.3V

BCLK

C2929

R2837

0.1 B

1K

0.2

FROM/TO MICON

U2 VIN3C
3.3

5

U1 VRMC
SICL V9

LPF

V1

3.3

R2851

W9

3.3
MCU_SCIRXD
MCU_SCITXD
I2C_CLK
I2C_DATA

10

C2947

R2852

MCLK
SDOUT

6

DVD-H

P1 VRPB

0.2

0.1 B

SW_C_IN

5

0

0.1 B

C2935

L1 VIN3A

N3 VIN5A

6

0.1 B

K2 SSIN2

10

7

10K

0.1 B

I2C_CLK

FROM/TO REGULATOR

I2C_DATA
S1_DET
TWIRE_RXDC
TWIRE_TXDC
LIGHT_CTL
LCD-H
GND
D3.3V
AT+3.3V

4

SCLK0(GPIO) AA8
SRXD0(GPIO) Y8
STXD0(GPIO) W8

3.3

ASW0
R2801

3.3
3.3

4.7K

ASW2
R2850

QBLCA J21 3.0 BL_PWM
QBLCB(GPIO)J20
QBLCC(RXD0)J19

3

LCD-H

3.3

W854

TWIRE_TXDC

3.3

MCU_SCIRXD

3.3

MCU_SCITXD

3.3

3

IIC_OFF

SCL

Vss

SDA

8

3

A2

3.3

7

2

WP

0

6

Vcc

A1

3.3

5

1

A0

4

3.3

R2856

C2968

10K

0.1 B

2

I2C_CLK

EEP ROM
IC2805
M24256-BWMN6TP
I2C_DATA

SANT
V6

AA6 BCKO

Y6 LRCKO

Y7 RFAGC(GPIO)
R2874
4.7K

DVD-H W881

BCLK

LRCK

SDOUT

MCLK

10K
SPDIF

0.1 B

TWIRE_RXDC

0

10K
R2841

C2965

0.1 B

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

ACLK

W6 ADATAO
3.3

SPDIFO
V5

W5
3.3

Y5

3.3

10K

V4

W4

0

3.3

C2959

W855

0
R2842

0

W3

2.0

SCISCK(GPIO) W7

4.7K

3.3

0

S1_DET

LOUT

V8
SCIRXD V7

R2846

ASW2
LIGHT_CTL

4.7K

3.0

0

4.7K

4.7K
R2840

1.6

R2838

R2839
C2951

220P CH
ROUT

220P CH

C2950

0.1 B

C2948

10V 22 V-S
C2949

2

2.0

AA3

ROUT
AA4 LOUT

DAC_VREF

J18

PCBDH0
CEH420

1

1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-11

4

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D

E

F

G

H

H-12

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

25

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

1.4

8
L5801

W878

C5814

C5812
22P CH

22P CH

C5811

0.1 B

C5809

0.1 B

C5806

1 F
50V(2125)

C5805

0.1 B

C5803

6.3V 220 V-S
C5804

7

TU_CVBS

33P CH 22uHNLV25

0.6

1.0

NC

5.0

2.5

5.0

5.0

NC

30.0

5.0

NC

1.0

1.0

24

21 IF_OUT2

20 IF_OUT1
IF_O

19 IF_AGC

18 IF_OUT

17 +5V

16 AFT

15 SCL

14 SDA

12 +30V

11 TU

9 +5V

NC
4
NC

8 V_OUT

NC
3
NC

7 AGC

NC
2
NC

5 SIF-out

NC(BB)
1

22

23

8

ENG36E18KRF

NC

TU5801

7

IF_OUT_2

IF_OUT_1

IF_AGC

B5803

B5801
FCM1608KF-102T02

FCM1608KF-102T02

C5801
6.3V 220 V-S

R5801

R5819

100
0.01 B

100
0.01 B

C5844

R5820

B5802
FCM1608KF-102T02

C5845

47K

R5802
100

R5804

R5803

100

150K

6

6

C5846

SCALER IC
IC2801
R8J66954BG

56P CH
L5805

W802

W846

1.4

0.22uHLQW18AN

ADIN1

W858
47K

0.6
R5825

W804

5

47K

R5824

5

1.6
1.6

R5823
GND
D5.0V
TUNER+30V
D3.3V

1.0

AA2 ADVREF2

AA7 IF_AGC

2.4
R5822
R5821

3.3

47

3.3

3.3

2.2 B

2.2

R5810

100

5.0
0

R5811

180K

R5812

100

NC
5.0

C5827

2.2 B

1.7
2.2
2.2

TO AV SWITCH

C5830

2.2 B

NC
1.3

SAP DET

NC

NOISE DET

INPUT

SIF/BB

SIF REF

MUTE

STEREO REF

FOMO

SDA/SAPID
GND
PE

MODE
AGC SW
IIC/PARA

SCL/STID

SPE FIL

AGC DET

SPE DEL

ROUT
LOUT
NC
L-R RBF

SPE TIME
WB DET
WB TIME
NC

Y9

SICL0

AA9 SIDA0

MCU_ADC

IIC0

3

R5807
100K

47P CH

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

4.7 B

C5826

VCC

NC
2.2

8

C5825

L+R REF

7

NC
2.2

NC

PLL

NC
5.0

6

D
G

3.3
5.0
3.3
BUFFER
Q5801
2SK3019_TL

0

PILOT DET

2.4

C5837 0.022 B

5

0.001 B

3.5

2.4

C5838

0.1 B

4

0.1 B

C5817

3.5

0.5

C5839

3.3 B

3

4.7K
MA111

R5809

4.7K
D5804

C5824 3.3K

5.0

3.3
S

0.22 B

0.33 B
R5813

2.9

C5840

0.33 B

2

G

3.3

C5823
C5818

0.5

C5841

10 C

1

I2C_DATA

MCUADIN0

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC
IC5801
AN5832SA-E1V
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

D

S

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

MA111

D5803

R5808

FCM1608KF-151T06

SIF_OUT

AA5

C5819
6.3V 220 V-S

B5804

BUFFER
Q5802
2SK3019_TL

C5821

C5822
47P CH

3

C5833

2.8

C5834 0.033 B

2.2 B

2.9

C5835

0.1 B

NC

2

NC
NC
NC

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NC

PCBDH0
CEH420

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

1

TU_AUDIO_R

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

TU_AUDIO_L

A

Y2 ADVREF1

4

47

H-13

VSB_ADC

0.1 B

C5847

3.3K

3.3K
R5818

R5817

I2C0D

1

ADVREF0

TUNER_IF

I2C0C

I2C_CLK

ADIN0

W2

1K

TU_AFT

2

Y1

0.1 B

0.1 B
C5855

C5853

FROM/TO REGULATOR

0.1 B

C5852

0.8

4

AA1

B

C

D

E

F

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

G

H

H-14

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

8

7

7

SCALER IC

IC2801

R8J66954BG

6

6
R3629

3.3

J2 EXT_RES

470

R3630

3.3

G4 HDMI_SCL10

4.7K

R3631

5

3.3

5

F3 HDMI_SDA10

4.7K
0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

E3 PWR0

D3.3V
0

GND

4

NR3602
4D02WGJ0472TCE

E2 HDMI_XOUT

NC

C1

PLL_XFC_A

NC

D1

PLL_XFC_P

NC

D2

PLL_XFC_X

3.3
3.3
3.3
NR3601
4D02WGJ0472TCE

HDMI_XIN

NC

3.3

3

E1

3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3

4

G3 RX1N
F2 RXCP

3

F1 RXCN
G2 RX0P
G1 RX0N
H3 RX1P
H1 RX2N
H2 RX2P

2

2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1

A

H-15

B

C

D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E

1

F

G

H

H-16

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

LVDS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

7

SCALER IC

IC2801

8

7

R8J66954BG

FROM/TO PANEL

3.3

B2807

PLLAVCC_2

0.1 B

C2880

0.1 B

C2874

A17

PLLAVCC_1

0
0

GND

D14 PLLAVSS
A18

PLLAVSS

D3.3V
B2808
D1.0V

1.0

HCB1608KF-221T20
B2809

B17

PLLDVDD_2

NC

LVDS1OUT0P B19

NC

LVDS1OUT1M A20

NC

LVDS1OUT1P A21

NC

LVDS1OUT2M B20

NC

LVDS1OUT2P B21

NC

LVDS1CLKOUTM C19

NC

LVDS1CLKOUTP D19

NC

LVDS1OUT3M C20

NC

LVDS1OUT3P C21

NC

LVDS1OUT4M D20

NC

LVDS1OUT4P D21

NC

0

E14

D15 PLLDVSS

LVDS0OUT0M E19

3.3

0
0
1.0

REFR

LVDS0OUT1M E20
LVDS0OUT1P E21

F17
E17
F18

LVDS_CH0

D17

VSS33BIAS

VCC33BIAS
VCC33LVDS
VCC33LVDS

E16 VSS33LVDS
G17 VSS33LVDS
H17

LVDS0OUT2M F20
LVDS0OUT2P F21
LVDS0CLKOUTM G18
LVDS0CLKOUTP G19
LVDS0OUT3M G20
LVDS0OUT3P G21

NC

30

NC

NC

29

RX0-

28

GND

27

RX1+

26

RX2-

25

GND

24

RXCLK+

23

RX3-

22

GND

21

NC

20

GND

19

GND

18

VDD+5V

17

VDD+5V

16

NC

15

GND

14

RX0+

13

RX1-

12

0

J17

CH0_TXOUT0CH0_TXOUT0+

NR2811
CRA108220JV

1.6
1.6

1.6

NR2810
CRA108220JV

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

GND

11

RX2+

10

RXCLK-

9

GND

8

RX3+

7

NC

NC

6

NC

NC

5

GND

4

VDD+5V

3

VDD+5V

2

VDD+5V

1

CH0_TXOUT1CH0_TXOUT1+
CH0_TXOUT2CH0_TXOUT2+

1.6

CH0_TXCLKOUTCH0_TXCLKOUT+
CH0_TXOUT3CH0_TXOUT3+

R2800
22

LVDS0OUT4M H20

NC

LVDS0OUT4P H21

NC

RSDSA H18

NC

RSDSB H19

NC

6

5

4

R2830
V2801
M156B1-L02

22

LCD PANEL

VCC10LVDS

0.1 B

4V 47 V-S
C2872

HCB1608KF-221T20
C2867

D18

0.1 B

3.3
3.3
C2879

C2876

10V 22 V-S

0.1 B

C2866

10V 22 V-S
C2871

HCB1608KF-221T20
B2805

B2803

LPFP

LVDS POWER/REF

0

HCB1608KF-221T20

E18

5.6K

1K
0.01 B

0
R2836

R2835
C2868

1.4

4

NC

NC

PLLDVSS
LVDS0OUT0P F19

B2804

CP2804
A2006WV0-2X15P

NC
0

5

PLLDVDD_1

0.1 B

C2881

4V 47 V-S

0.1 B

C2869

HCB1608KF-221T20

C2877

1.0
4V 47 V-S
C2875

VDD_PANEL

E13

PLL POWER

FROM/TO REGULATOR

C2975

C2974

6

16V10 V-S

HCB1608KF-221T20

16V10 V-S

3.3

C15

LVDS_CH1

B2806
HCB1608KF-221T20

LVDS1OUT0M A19

LVDS
CD2804
CHRU1803

VSS10LVDS

3

3

6.3V 220 V-S

C2800

B2800
HCB1608KF-181T20

2

2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1

A

H-17

B

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C

D

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

ARE

E

1

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

F

G

H

H-18

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

SCALER POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

8

7

7

TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

SCALER IC
R8J66954BG

AD_A3.3V

0.1 B
C2912
0.1 B
C2913

1 B
1 B
1 B

C2908
C2909

1 B

B2820
HCB1608KF-121T20

10V22 V-S

C2923

0.1 B

0.1 B

0

C2920

3.3

4

0
B2821

3.3

0

10V22 V-S

VSS33ADDAU3

HCB1608KF-121T20

3.3

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2822

1.8
VDD18 K3
1.8
VDD18 T3

VSS18 R4

0.1 B

0

10V22 V-S

VSS18 K5

C2924

D1.8V

C2922

GND

HCB1608KF-121T20
0.1 B

VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS

0

C2921

VSS33 R5

B2817

0.1 B

0.1 B

10V22 V-S
C2901

VSS33 H5

HCB1608KF-121T20

3.3

C2917

0.1 B

1 B
C2900

C2896
C2891

3

DVDDABC
DVSSABC

VDD33ADDAV2

E8
E10
E12
K10
K11
K12
L10
L11
L12
M10
M11
M12
U7

5
B2816

VSS33AD_A W1 0

D3.3V

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0

A3.3V

HCB1608KF-121T20

VCC33AD_A V3 3.3

VDD33 U4

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2815

3.3

C2914

P5

0

4V 330 V-S

DLLVSS

0.1 B
C2910

DLLVDD T4

0.1 B
C2911

PLLVSS N5

C2906

Core_Power

VDD33 J3

4

W849

3.3

C2907

PLLVDD P4
A3.3V

VSS33DA_A Y3

3.3
M4
0
M5

0

0
ADVSS J5
0
ADVSS L5

VCC33DA_A Y4

B2811

6

0

C2918

VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD

0

4V 330 V-S

C2902
ADVSS G5

E7
E9
E15
J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
K9
K13
L9
L13
M9
M13
N9
N10
N11
N12
N13
T5
U6
U9

W848

3.3

Io_Power
ADVSS F5

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

3.3

C2919

0.1 B

1 B
C2894
0.1 B

C2882

4V100 V-S
C2898
1 B
C2885

C2884

AVDDC L4

ADVSS H4

W809

5

VCCQ33
VCCQ33
VCCQ33
VCCQ33
VCCQ33

0.1 B

C2887

1 B

C2883

6

10V 22 V-S
C2890

HCB1608KF-221T20

E5
E6
E11
U5
U8

0.1 B
C2905

AVDDB K4
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3

0.1 B
C2904

AVDDA J4
B2810

3.3

0.1 B
C2903

IC2801

0

3

FROM/TO REGULATOR
D1.0V
D1.8V
GND
D3.3V

2

2

PCBDH0
CEH420

1

A

H-19

B

C

1

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

D

E

F

G

H

H-20

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

FLASH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

TRST_N

EEP/PC_TOOL_JIG_CON
CP2801 A2001WV2-7P
D3.3V

7
6

PC_TOOL_TX

PC_TOOL_TX

5

PC_TOOL_RX

PC_TOOL_RX

IIC_OFF

IIC_OFF

SDA

I2C_DATA

2

SCL

I2C_CLK

1

D_GND

4
3

7

TDO
D3.3V

ASEBRKAK_N

1

TRST_N

2

TDO

3

ASEBRKAK_N 4

TMS

TMS

5

TDI

TDI

6

RESET_N

RESET_N

7

FLASH_WP

FLASH_WP

8

ASEMD0
C2807

GND

0.1 B

SCALER IC

A2001WV2-11P
TCK

ASEMD0

9

GND

10

VDD33

11

D3.3V

3.3

RESET_N

3.3
R2807 10K
R2809 10K
C2808
0.01 B

0
3.3

ASEMD0
ASEBRKAK_N

0

TDO

0

TDI

0

TMS

0
3.3

TCK

0

TRST_N

IC2801

A1 RESET_N
E4

MODE0

F4

MODE1

B1

ASEMD0

C2

ASEBRKAK_N

A2

TDO

B2

TDI

C3

TMS

D3

TCK

D4

TRST_N

R8J66954BG
RESET/MODE

CP2803
TCK

E10A DEBUG

8

7

D3.3V
W827

6

R2810

10V22 V-S

C2802

D3.3V_FLASH

10K

0

USB_CS
WE0_N

3.3

CS0_N

3.3

RD_N

3.3

A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

0
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3

INVERTER_H

3.3

D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3

A6

WAIT_N(GPIO)

C6

WE0_N

B9

CS0_N

A9

RD_N

B6
D6
A5
D7
C7
A14
B3
A3
C4
B4
A4
D5
C5
B5
B7
A7
D8
C8
B8
A8
D9
C9

A22(GPIO)
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

B14

(GPIO)

A13
C13
A12
C12
A11
C11
A10
C10
B13
D13
B12
D12
B11
D11
B10
D10

D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

6

R2802

3.3

A20

3.3

A21

3.3

WE0_N

3.3

RESET_N

3.3
NC
0

FLASH_WP
JG2801

3.3

A19

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

4

IIC_OFF
I2C_DATA
I2C_CLK

A18

3.3

A8

3.3

A7

3.3

A6

3.3

A5

3.3

A4

3.3

A3

3.3

A2

3.3

A12

DQ15/A-1

A11
A10
A9
A8
A19

DQ5

A20

DQ12

WE#

DQ4

RESET#

VCC

A21/NC

DQ11

WP#/ACC
RY/BY#

DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13

DQ3
DQ10

A18

DQ2

A17

DQ9

A7

DQ1

A6

DQ8

A5

DQ0

A4

OE#

A3

VSS

A2

CE#

A1

A0

R2811
10K

3.3
3.3

A17
R2805

0

NR2802
CRA108100JV

10K

D15
D7
D14
D6

3.3
3.3
3.3
NR2803
CRA108100JV

3.3
3.3

D13
D5
D12
D4

3.3
3.3
3.3
C2806

3.3
3.3

NR2804
CRA108100JV

0.1 B

D11
D3
D10
D2

3.3
3.3
3.3
NR2801
CRA108100JV

3.3
3.3
3.3

D9
D1
D8
D0

3.3

RD_N

3.3

0
3.3

CS0_N

3.3

FROM/TO JACK
A1

A_MUTE

5

FLASH I/F

A9

VSS

NEAR FLASH

10K

3.3

A13

10K

R2806

3.3

A10

BYTE#

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

A11

1

3.3

2

3.3

A12

A16

A14

3

A13

A15

5

3.3

6

3.3

A14

7

A15

8

3.3

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

5

A16

4

NOR FLASH IC
IC2804
EN29LV320AB-70TCP

4

FROM/TO MICON
ASEMD0
IIC_OFF
RESET_N

INVERTER_H
D3.3V
GND

0

PC_TOOL_TX

JG2804

0

JG2805

0

JG2806

A_MUTE

JG2802

3.3
0

NC

C2810

22P CH

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-21

B

M32TCK

C18

M32TMS

B18

M32TRST_N

C14

VCNT(GPIO)

A16

XOUT

B16

XIN

A15

XOUT25

1M

M32TDO

C17

1.2

1.2
1M

1.8K

X2802

R2813

20P CH

C2812

1

M32TDI

D16

2

9

C2811

R2815

7P CH

1.8K

1.2
R2814

X2801

5P CH

100GT02509
25MHz

2

R2812
100GT02728
27MHz

C2809

GND

C16

27MHz CLK

FROM/TO REGULATOR

JG2803

M32R DEBUG

3
PC_TOOL_RX

1.2

B15

XIN25

25MHz CLK

3

PCBDH0
CEH420

1

10

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C

D

E

F

G

H

H-22

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

DDR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

8

R2823

27

R2824

27

DARAS_N

DDR_SDRAM IC
IC2802
HYB18TC256160BF-3S

DAA0
DAA1
DAA2
DAA3
DAA4
DAA5
DAA6
DAA7
DAA8
DAA9
DAA10
DAA11
DAA12

7

1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8

M8
M3
M7
N2
N8
N3
N7
P2
P8
P3
M2
P7
R2

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12

DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13

G8
G2
H7
H3
H1
H9
F1
F9
C8
C2
D7
D3
D1
D9

DQ14 B1
DQ15 B9

1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8

DAQ0
DAQ1
DAQ2
DAQ3
DAQ4
DAQ5
DAQ6
DAQ7
DAQ8
DAQ9
DAQ10
DAQ11
DAQ12

1.8

DAQ13

1.8

DAQ14

1.8

SCALER IC
DACLK
DACLK_N

6

5

CS

K8
L8

5.1

1.6

W20
W21

SDCLK
SDCLK_N

SDODT

1.6

1.8
1.8
DACAS_N

R2827

1.8
1.8

27

DAQM0

1.8

DAQM1

1.8

Y20
V21

SDCKE
SDCS_N

Y21

SDRAS_N
SDCAS_N

Y19

SDWE_N

V19

SDBA1

DACS_N

1.8

DARAS_N

RAS K7
1.8
CAS L7
1.8
ODT K9

DADQS0
DADQS1

DACAS_N
DAODT
DADQS0_N
DADQS1_N

V17

SDA0

U20

SDA1

AA18

SDA2

AA20

SDA3
SDA4

AA17

SDA5

V16

L21

SDDM0
SDDM1

AA14

SDDM2

0
NC
AA11
1.8
N18
1.8
K18
0
NC
V13
0
NC
V10
1.8
N19
1.8
K19
0
NC
W13
0
NC
W10

SDDM3

SDA6
SDA7

U21

SDDQS0
SDDQS1

SDA8
SDA9

T20

SDDQS2
SDDQS3

SDA10

Y18

SDA11

W16

SDA12

T18

NC

DACLK_N

1.8

V18

SDBA0 AA19

160

1.6

160

CK
CK

J8

R2820

F7 LDQS
DADQS0_N1.8 E8 LDQS
DADQS1 1.8 B7
UDQS
DADQS1_N1.8 A8 UDQS
1.8
DAQM0
F3 LDM
1.8
DAQM1
B3 UDM
1.8
DACKE
K2 CKE
DAWE_N 1.8 K3 WE
1.8
DABA0
L2 BA0
1.8
DABA1
L3 BA1

R2826

1.6

0

P21

SDDQS0_N

DACKE

NR2805
CRA108270JV

R8J66954BG

DAQ15

R2817

1.8

5.1

1.8

DACLK
DADQS0

R2825

IC2801

U18

Y16
Y17

DABA1
DAODT
DAA4
DAA12

1.8

1.8

7

NR2806
CRA108270JV

1.8

DAA8
DAA6
DAA0
DACS_N

1.8

NR2807
CRA108270JV

1.8

DAA2
DAWE_N
DABA0
DAA10

1.8
1.8
1.8
NR2808
CRA108270JV

1.8
1.8

DAA1
DAA9
DAA3
DAA7

1.8
1.8

6

1.8
1.8
1.8

NR2809
CRA108270JV

1.8

DAA11
DAA5

SDDQS1_N
SDDQS2_N

NC
NC

SDDQS3_N

NC
NC

5

1K +-1%

R2818
R2819

C2822

M21

SDDQ15
SDDQ16

Y14
W15
V14

SDDQ17
SDDQ18

V15

SDDQ19

AA16

SDDQ20

Y15

SDDQ21

AA15

SDDQ22

Y13

SDDQ23

V11

SDDQ24
SDDQ25

W11
Y11

SDDQ26

V12

SDDQ27
SDDQ28

AA13
AA12
Y12

SDDQ29
SDDQ30

AA10

SDDQ31

1K +-1%

A2 NC1
0.1 B

NC

D1.8V

0.1 B

NC

NC3
E2 NC2

SDDQ14

2

0.1 B

1B

0.1 B

1B

C2857

C2858

C2861

3

1K +-1%

NC6

SDDQ13

K21

4

1K +-1%

1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC
1.8
NC

N21

1B

1.8

C2856

1.8

DAQ9

0.1 B

DAQ15

SDDQ11
SDDQ12

L19

C2854

1.8

0.1 B

DAQ11

SDDQ10

M18

C2855

1.8

0.1 B

DAQ13

SDDQ9

L20

C2852

1.8

1B

DAQ10

SDDQ8

L18

C2853

1.8

0.1 B

1.8

DAQ14

SDDQ7

M20

C2848

DAQ8

P20

0.1 B

1.8

C2849

1.8

DAQ12

D1.8V
VCCQ18 K20 1.8
0
VSS
K17
0
VSS
L17
0
VSS
M19
VCCQ18 M17 1.8
SDVREF0 N17 0.9
VCCCQ18 P19 1.8
0
VSS
P17
0
VSS
R17
VCCQ18 T19 1.8
VCCQ18 T17 1.8
0
VSS
U19
0
VSS
U17
1.8
VCCQ18 V20
VCCQ18 W19 1.8
VCCQ18 W18 1.8
0
VSS
W17
0
VSS
AA21
0
VSS
U16
0
VSS
U15
VCCQ18 U14 1.8
0
VSS
W14
0.9
SDVREF1 U13
1.8
VCCQ18 W12
0
VSS
U12
0
VSS
U11
0
VSS
Y10
VCCQ18 U10 1.8

0.1 B

DAQ6

N20

FROM/TO REGULATOR
GND

C2847

1.8

R19

1B

DAQ7

SDDQ4
SDDQ5
SDDQ6

C2846

1.8

SDDQ3

P18

0.1 B

DAQ2

SDDQ2

R18

0.1 B

1.8

T21

C2843

1B

0.1 B
C2813

C2815
1B

DAQ0

C2816

0.1 B

1.8

R2828

L1

DAQ5

R21

R2829

NC

1.8

0.1 B

R7 NC5
R3 NC4

1.8

DAQ4

SDDQ0
SDDQ1

0.1 B

NC

DAQ1

R20

C2850

NC

1.8

C2851

R8

C2821

3

NC

C2814

4

VDD A1
VDD E1
VDD J9
VDD M9
VDD R1
VDDQA9
VDDQC1
VDDQC3
VDDQC7
VDDQC9
VDDQE9
VDDQG1
VDDQG3
VDDQG7
VDDQG9
VDDLJ1
VREFJ2

1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.9

DAQ3

C2842

A3 VSS
E3 VSS
0
J3 VSS
0
N1 VSS
0
P9 VSS
0
A7 VSSQ
0
B2 VSSQ
0
B8 VSSQ
0
D2 VSSQ
0
D8 VSSQ
0
E7 VSSQ
0
F2 VSSQ
0
F8 VSSQ
0
H2 VSSQ
0
H8 VSSQ
0
J7 VSSDL
0

C2841

0

2
C2859
1 B
6.3V(2125)

PCBDH0
CEH420

1

A

H-23

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B

C

D

E

F

1

G

H

H-24

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

7

8

7

DVD-H

SW

GND

VCC

6

B2

FROM/TO REGULATOR
3.3

5

2.9

1

R6551

DVD_SPDIF

2

DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC
IC6556
TC7PA53FU

3.3

100
0

B6551

2.9

B1

A

4

R6552

SPDIF

3

HCB1608KF-121T20
3.3

FILTER_MUTE
DVD_SPDIF
D5.0V
D3.3V
GND

SPDIF_OUT

6

4.7 B
6.3V(2125)

C6554

100

6
TO AV SWITCH

GND
ROUT

20

GND

19

AV3_V

18

GND

17

AV3_U

16

GND

15

AV3_Y

14

GND

13

AV1_C

12

GND

11

AV1_Y

10

GND

9

GND

7

YUV R IN

6

GND

5

CVBS1

4

GND

3

AV1 L IN

2

GND

1

AV1 R IN

2
C4306

E

100P CH

100K

R4310

220

1.5K

R4307

R4302

1

B4302
FCM1608CF-600T06

470

LOUT_SOUND

D3402
ROUT_SOUND

MUTE SW 5.8
Q3407
KRC102SRTK

AV3/AV4_PR
0

5

W840

A_MUTE

MA111
D3403
0

AUDIO_MUTE

MA111

AV1_CVBS
AV3/AV4_Y
AV3/AV4_PB
AV3/AV4_PR
SPDIF
DVD-H
LOUT_FI
ROUT_FI

AV3/AV4_PB
FROM FLASH

AV3/AV4_Y

A_MUTE

AV1_C
AV1_Y

4

FROM MICON

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV L IN

8

3.2

68
1/10W

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

LOUT

21

3.3K

2.2K

2.8

AV1_Y
AV1_C
AV1_A_IN_L
AV1_A_IN_R
YUV_A_IN_L
YUV_A_IN_R

R3431

FILTER_MUTE

TWG-P23P-A1

22

0.1 B

0.022 B
R4306

0.1 B

10V100 V-S

C4302
23

3

R4301

FROM/TO JACK/OUT
(CP8101)
CP4301

4

C4301

C4303

FCM1608CF-600T06

5

C4304

5.0

H

B4301

D5.0V

COAXIAL
J4301
RCA-101HT(OR)

D AUDIO DRIVER
Q4301
KTC3875S_Y_RTK R4309

AUDIO_MUTE

YUV_A_IN_R
AV1_CVBS
AV1_A_IN_L
AV1_A_IN_R

ROUT_SOUND
LOUT_SOUND

ROUT_FI
LOUT_FI

3

2

2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1

A

H-25

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D

E

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

1

F

G

H

H-26

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

1.2
3.3
3.3

R6569

0

VD

LRCK

DGND

SDTO

C6559

56K

R6584

56K

R6581

1
2

6.6

C6580

4

YUV_A_IN_R

1B
16V(1608)

BAIAS
6.5

3.3

C6584

TU_AUDIO_R
TU_AUDIO_R

1B
16V(1608)

RESET_N

1B

5

BUFFER

2

4.5

5

FROM JACK
AV1_Y

C6574_1

4.5

L

AV1_Y

0

AV1_C
AV1_A_IN_L

10 B
2125

AV1_A_IN_R

NR6551
CRA108470JV

H

VCC

4

YUV_A_IN_L
5.0

3

B6554

0/3.3

6

VCC C6578

1

Y SW IC
IC6554 MM1501XNRE

4

FCM1608CF-600T06

B6553

FCM1608KF-102T02

B6552

4

FCM1608KF-102T02

C6560
0.1 B

3
OUT

FROM TUNER
TU_AUDIO_L

SW_Y_IN
16V10 V-S

DVD-H

1B
16V(1608)

56K

3.3

AV1_A_IN_R

R6590

1

8

12.0

ASW2
C6568

6.5

2

DVD_R

1B
16V(1608)

100DT01217
X6551
12.288MHz
NC
2
1

0.1 B

SW_C_IN

3

C6566

6.5

7

5

4.5

SW_R

BUFFER

6

6

1
2

H

1B
16V(1608)

6

SW_Y_IN

5

3.3

VCC

0

4

12.0

BUFFER

3

16

1
2

15
14
13

4.5

0

100
3.3

ASW0

Rch SW IC
IC6558
NJM2534V
C6571

MCLK

56K

MCLK

3.3

4.5

L

1 B
16V(1608)

VA

SCLK

SDOUT
TU_AUDIO_L

R6582

16V10 V-S
C6556

AGND

Rch SW IC
IC6553 MM1501XNRE

C6582

5.0

PDN

7

5

VCOM

3.3

12

0
C6555

DIF

LRCK
BCLK

3.3

0

11

2.5

CKS1

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
ASW0

C6553

0

10

2.2 B (1608)

CKS2

YUV_A_IN_L

1B
16V(1608)

9

5.0

AINL

CKS0

8

C6557

3.8

AINR

3

1B
16V(1608)

3.8

4

1B
16V(1608)

5

C6561

6

C6562

8

6.5

AUDIO_ADC IC
IC6551
AK5358A

6

3.3

1B
16V(1608)

BAIAS

ASW2

10K

DVD_L

1B
16V(1608)

6.6

C6579

10K
R6585

4.5

C6551

H

4

VCC

C6565

1 B
16V(1608)

7
AV1_A_IN_L

R6583

2.7K
C6563

3.3K

12.0

3

14

R6561

AUDIO_R

1 B
16V(1608)

R6559

7

12.0

2.7K

3.3

3

0

1B
16V(1608)

C6581

BUFFER

6.5

SW_L

6.5

4

4.5

5

AUDIO_L

3.3K

BUFFER

2

13

C6570

6

4.5

5

3.3

L

R6562

0

Lch SW IC
IC6552 MM1501XNRE

330

R6558

Lch SW IC
IC6557
NJM2534V

1 B
16V(1608)

R6501

8

DVD-H

6

330

1

R6502
C6564

7

16V220 V-S

SW+12V

8

C6575

4.5

DVD_Y

YUV_A_IN_R

10 C
2125

C6572

4

1 B

MCLK
SDOUT
LRCK
BCLK

DVD-H
D5.0V

B6556

1 B

C6569

HCB1608KF-181T20
FROM MICON
RESET_N
SW_C_IN

3

3

6

0/3.3

1

C SW IC
IC6555
MM1501XNRE
C6577

4.5

L

5

2

H

VCC

0

4

5.0

BUFFER

3

4.5

4.5

AV1_C

10 C
2125
C6576

FROM/TO REGULATOR
DVD_Y
DVD_C

10 C
2125

DVD_C
DVD_L
DVD_R

C6573

SW+12V

1 B

GND
D3.3V

2

2

D5.0V

PCBDH0
CEH420

1

1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-27

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

H-28

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(DIGITAL PCB)

8

8

FROM/TO POWER
CP3001(CP501)
A2006WV0-2x10P

AT+5.8V

3

AT+12V

for LCD PANEL
W817

2
1

B3008
HCB1608KF-181T20

R3002
AT+12V

0

6.8K

5.2

3

NC

LCD+B_SW
Q3005
0 KRC102SRTK

FILTER_MUTE

FILTER_MUTE

GND

1.0
0

B3003

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
S1_DET
AT+3.3V
LIGHT_CTL
D3.3V
TWIRE_TXDC
TWIRE_RXDC
LCD-H
GND

GND

VDD_PANEL

0

W826

5.2
1

FROM/TO TUNER

D
D
LCD+B_SW
Q3009
TPC6108
S
D
D
4

5

NC
3

6
5.2

0

NC

5.2

TUNER+30V
D3.3V
D5.0V
GND

5.8

2

1

GND

SW

3.3V REGULATOR IC
IC3009
S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

1

B

C3004

5.8

IN

D3.3V
INVERTER_H
GND

OUT

4

5
3.3

5.8

AT+3.3V

FROM/TO LVDS
D3.3V
D1.0V
VDD_PANEL
GND

4.7 B

C3055

4.7 B

C3054

AT+5.8V
5.0V REGULATOR IC
IC3007
BD7820FP

6

FROM/TO FLASH

AT+5.8V

5

7

D1.0V

HCB1608KF-181T20

5.2uHCDRH104R

G

3.0

LCD-H

2

D3006
EC31QS04

SW
PGND

22 B
6.3V(2125)

4

GND

22 B
6.3V(2125)
C3031

AT+5.8V

ITH

D3.3V
GND

(typ 1.8A)
L3002

10 C
10V(2125)
C3029

GND

5

TUNER+30V

0

3.3

10 C
10V(2125)
C3027

M_GND

0.3

PVCC

FROM/TO HDMI
3.0

10 C
10V(2125)
C3026

P.CON+32V

7

W818

1K

VCC

EN

C3024

LIGHT_CTL

LIGHT_CTL

3.3

ADJ

8

INVERTER_H

0.8

1

INVERTER_H

R3005

2

S_DET

10

6

LV_CTL

S1_DET

8

VDD CORE 1.05V IC
IC3001
BD9130NV

3

POWER_ON-H

11
9

6

POWER_ON_H

R3018
150 +-1%

22uH
TSL0808

4

12

EC11FS4

AT+5.8V
C3056

AT+12V

W816

C3015

AT+5.8V

13

EC11FS4
W815

8.2K

14

D3007

4.7K +-1%

GND

R3016
1.8K +-1%

L3001

D3005

1 B

GND

15

AT+5.8V

680P CH
10K
R3009

16

POWER_FAIL

R3008

GND

0.1 B

POWER_FAIL

17

C3016

18

IC
VCC1.0V DC/DC

7

KEY_A

6

KEY_B

KEY-A

5

KEY-B

19

R3010

7

20

5

CTL

IN

GND

OUT

ADJ

FROM/TO MICON

1

2

6

4

5

5.8

5.8

0

POWER_ON_H

5.0

0.8

R3032

B3023
FCM1608KF-102T02

CS

21

P.CON+3.3V

22

P.CON+12V

23

P.CON+A5V

24

GND(M)

0

TWIRE_RXDC
5.8

NC

LCD+B_SW
Q3006
KRC101S-RTK

W856

S
4

D
5
6.0

D
6
6.0

75

75
R3038

R3039

10P CH

10P CH
C3066

C3065

5.8

B

C3021 0.001 B

B3005

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3004

HCB1608KF-181T20

3.3

DC DC FET
Q3011 TPC6108

3.3

3.3

FROM/TO AV SWITCH
D3.3V

4V82 CD

C3022

D3004

HCB1608KF-181T20
EC31QS04

5.8
6.2

8
7
6
5

1
2
3
4

R3023

C3011

1K +-1%
VB
2

6.8K
+-1%

330
0

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

D

L3003

B3017

DVD+3.3V

HCB1608KF-181T20

(DDR2:typ 1095mA)

22uH
TSL0808

V_OUT V_ADJ GND
6
4
5

R3007

0

SYS_POWER_H

C

220
+-1%

R3015 R3017

POWER_ON_H
D3.3V

0
SW
Q3001
KRC102SRTK

A

3.3

3.3K

3.0
5.8

3.3

H-29

1.5K
+-1%

IC
1.8V_REGULATOR IC
IC3003
PQ035ZN1HZPH V_IN

W857 MOTOR_GND

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

R3025

SW+12V
DVD_R
DVD_L
DVD_Y
DVD_C
D5.0V
D3.3V
GND

3

D1.8V
GND

AT+5.8V

SW
Q3002
KRA101SRTK

R3024

FROM/TO DDR

1

TO DVD PCB
CD3002
E82O1101

1

FB

B3006
HCB1608KF-181T20
B3007

1

SW+12V

AT+5.8V

1

6.0

2

G
D
D
MOTOR+6V_SW
Q3010
RTQ035P02

5.8

0

CC

1.3

0.1 B

E

C3023 2.2 B

20

0

3.3

RX

GND

C3018 2.2 B

GND

19

EXT

Vref/SS

C3047 4V47 V-S

18

2

D1.8V

FROM/TO JACK
D3.3V
D5.0V
DVD_SPDIF
FILTER_MUTE
GND

4V330 V-S

DVD_C

3

C3049

[U]C_VIDEO

6.0

3

V5/PWON

1.2

4

D3.3V
D1.8V
D1.0V
GND

6.3V 330 TZV
C3048

17

0

6.8K

D

0

DVD_Y

D

1.3

DVD_L

[V]Y_VIDEO

G

FROM/TO SCALER POWER

2

GND

150
+-1%

3.3K

DVD_A_OUT_L

16

0

6
D

R3013

DVD_A_OUT_R

15

3.3

1.2

C3019

CS

1.8

14

DVD_R

B3015
HCB1608KF-181T20

R3035

4.5

5.8
VIN

R3012 1K

4.7K

R3042

3.3V_POWER_H

MOTOR+6V

0.1 B
C3012 0.1 B

GND

C3043

13

(1608)

0

5.8
1.2

0

5
D

6.3V 220 V-S

P.CON+6V

0.1 B

4.5

5.8
SW
Q3003
KRC103SRTK 0

8.2K

GND

12

C3014

4
S

0.047 1/4W 2125
VDD CORE 1.8V IC
IC3002
AL1015

SW
Q3004
KRC103SRTK

DVD+3.3V

P.CON+3.3V

11

6.3V 68 CD

0

GND

R3020

C3006

DVD_STATUS_1 NC

C3013

22uH
TSL0808

0.033 B

FCM1608KF-102T02

0.047 1/4W 2125

L3005

R3014

22K

C3039
10 B

1 B

0
SW
Q3008
KRC102SRTK

TWIRE_TXDC

for CORE

AT+5.8V

12K

TX

R3022

R3019

START_SW

START_SW

R3040

10

10K
B3022

0.33 B

9

DVD_RESET
R3044

C3040

8

R3041

GND

SW+12V

SW
Q3007
0
KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

4.7K

DVD_RESET

5

12.0

12.0

W847

NC

L3004
22uHCDRH104R

D5.0V
AT+12V

R3045

4

470
+-1%

GND

220
+-1%

ZERO

3

2125
R3033

2

R3034

SPDIF-134

7

2

DVD_SPDIF

1

6

3

C3038

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO
CP3002(CP8501,CP8502)
A2006WV0-2X12P

VCC+3.3V DC/DC

B3014
HCB1608KF-181T20

3.9K
+-1%

4

LV_CTL
SYS_POWER_H
3.3V_POWER_H
AT+3.3V
KEY_A
KEY_B
POWER_FAIL
DVD_RESET
START_SW
AT+5.8V
D5.0V
GND

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

PCBDH0
CEH420

ARE

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

1

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

F

G

H

H-30

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(POWER PCB)

8

8

12.0

INV_SGND
2

1

1K 1/4W

25V 0.15 B

C545
C546

8

1
2

7
5

MA111

R543

FROM/TO JACK OUT

C512

C535_1

NC

GND

16V100 MHE

10uH
TSL0808

16V220 MHE

C511

C504

10V2200 HD

W807

R518

HS502_1
763WSA0068

6

S_DET

AT+5.8V

5.8

R521

2.2K 1/4W

POWER FAIL SW
Q505
KTA1504S_Y_RTK

100 1/4W

MTZJ12B

5.8

10K

R529

R538

D517

10K

50V 4.7 MHE_P

W840

M_GND

R535

4.0

POWER_FAIL

5

8.2K
W835
C522

16V 1000 HD

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

R517

REF

3

2

1

11.0

0

2.5

+-1%

R523
A

R525

C

FILTER_MUTE

1

FILTER_MUTE

2

NC
AT+12V

2.7K

2

250V 470P KX

FROM/TO REGULATOR
CP501(CP3001)
A2006WV0-2X10P

REGULATOR
IC502
KIA431A-AT

SH501
YQ-12

0.001 B

10K

R524

0.1 B

360 +-1%
C526

R519

AT+12V

3

AT+5.8V

4

AT+5.8V

5

GND

6

M_GND

7

P.CON+32V

P.CON+32V

8

LIGHT_CTL

LIGHT_CTL

9

INVERTER_H

INVERTER_H

10

S_DET

11

M_GND

2.2K +-1%

11.0

4

1K
C521

1

4

FEED BACK
IC505
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
12.0

3

NC

1K

R515

82K

HS501_1
763WSA0068

1H3-E
R513

R549
D526

C514

IS THE LIVE CONNECTION

GND
P.CON+32V

C517

0

CAUTION:

R536

FILTER_MUTE

330P B

2.8

3

1.3

D521

D511

MTZJ22B

50V 47 MHE_P

21.3

SOUND_GND

SOUND+B

2
3

C518

100

EC11FS2-TE12L
R507

D506

8
7

R511

MA111

C520

1H3-E

33 1/4W

25V0.15 B

220K +-1%
22K
C543_1 1 B 50V(21-25)

D514

0.1 B
C516

OUT

21.0

POWER_ON_H

GND
D516

RU3AM-EIC

UDZSNP33B
C509

GND

6

VCC

5

1
2

IS

NC

D509

C505

NC

169.0

22P CH

C503

330P CH

C501

4

0.001 B

0

FB

3

1.8

VH

4

2.8

ZCD

D519

MA111
D522

AT+12V

(21-25)
R547
2 1/4W +-1%

5.7

0

FROM/TO SOUND AMP

C538

L504

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0

(21-25)
R546
2 1/4W +-1%

POWER CONTORL
IC501
FA5531P-A2

FB

22uH
TSL0808

R531

B501

NC

L503

D523
FCQ10A04

100 1/4W

D512

2 1/4W +-1%

(21-25)
R545
2 1/4W +-1%

GND

0

400V0.022 PP

R512

100K 1/2W

R508

100K 1/2W

2KV470P R

C513
R544

NC

0

R533

7

NC

CPOUT

7

25V0.15 B
C539

0

10K +-1%

0
6

33K

S 1.8
R506

R505

20.0 G

D 169.0

150

5

3.0

EN

VRET

6

12.0

0

3

8

0
SW
Q504
0
KRC103SRTK

V_IN

MA111

16V220 MHE

0

5

12.0

4

0

12.0
12.0

0

C531

9

DC-DC CONVERTER
IC503
LA5797M-TE-L-E

SW
Q503
KRA103MAT

25V 1 B

10

3

0

GND

D520

16V1000 HD

169.0

5.8

C525

RM11C-EIC

LIGHT_CTL
INVERTER_H

3

RM11C-EIC

11

NC 2

INV_GND

D515
FCHS10A08

25V 0.15 B

12

1

0.22 1W

RM11C-EIC
D518

R510

1N4005-EIC

SWITCHING
Q501
STF10NK50Z

INV+B

INV_SGND

SARS01-V1

R502

RM11C-EIC
D507

TH501
5D2-08LCS

33 1/4W

R501

R504

6

SMALL
81240018

NC

22K 1/2W

D505

4A 125V

D510

W810

22K 1/2W

FH502
EYF-52BCY

D508

C502 200V 270 KXW

R509

C508

1

POWER_ON_H

1

C510

250V 0.001 KX

250V 0.001 KX

T501

1.2M 1W RCR

2

3

275V 0.1 ECQUL

D504

INV_GND

COIL,LINE FILTER
L501
SS24H-10100

4A125V
FH501
EYF-52BCY

4

FROM/TO BACKLIGHT INVERTER

POWER_ON_H

169.0
W808

ENE241D-10A-Q6

C506
2

F501
51MS040L

NC

275V 0.22 ECQUL

J501
CCT2302-0901C
NC
1

7

W828

R503

12M 1W
C507

INV+B

S_DET
POWER_ON_H
AT+5.8V

FROM/TO JACK/OUT
CD502 (CP2201)
E8231001
1
2
3

GND

GND

POWER_ON-H 12
AT+12V

13

AT+5.8V

14

GND

15

GND

16

GND

17

KEY-B

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-A

KEY-A

19

KEY-B

KEY-B

20

2

3

POWER_FAIL 18

2

KEY-B
KEY-A
TO/USA
CD3001
E82K1701

PCB240
CEH421
4A 125V

1

CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,
CAUTION:FOR
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

4A 125V (F501)

UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
ATTENTION:POUR
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

4A 125V (F501)

A

H-31

B

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

NOTE:THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR.
THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP
IS NON POLAR ONE.
D

E

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

1

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

F

G

H

H-32

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

BACKLIGHT INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(POWER PCB)

8

8

HIGH VOLTAGE
6KV10P SL

12.2

R7015

C7032

MA111

D7023

D7019

MA111

R7045

680
680

R7046

D7013
MA111

MA111

3.1

D7024

5

MA111

4

D7020

6

IS_DET1

10

R7050

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

1

VS_DET

LV

7

INV_SGND

LV

8

IS_DET2

10

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
HV

C7033

C7022

R7038

33 1/4W

8

12.4

22 1/4W

12.8

3

R7049

CN1

E82E0604

NC

NC

0

10 B
25V(32-16)

D

7

2

G

12.4
C7017

2.6

D

7

10 B
25V(32-16)

12.9

S

12.4

C7026

W819

POWER_ON_H

0

1SS133
R7036

D

12.4

500V 0.0022 B

POWER ON SW
Q7002
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

S

12.4

6

D7006
W809

D

5

INV_GND

S

3

0

FSS275-TL-E

4

0

1

Q7004

2

MA111

12.6

HV

HV

1

LV

2

LV

2

HV

1

CN2

14

6KV10P SL

1206FA5A-T
5A 32V

0

MA111

MA111

D7017

3.1
8

1

0.01 B

12.6

INV+B

GND

D7014

22 1/4W

F7001

6

C7031

C7030
12.4

CD7005

0.01 B

12.4

C7018

8

12.4

R7039

D

7

1

G

D

T7001
8135109G

D7018

FROM/TO POWER

2.6

S

12.4

33 1/4W 500V0.0022 B

1SS133
R7035

D

6

0

S

12.4

5

D7003

D

3

0

7

S

4

0

FSS275-TL-E

2

Q7005

7

6

HIGH VOLTAGE

HIGH VOLTAGE

POWER ON SW
Q7001
KRC103SRTK

D7015

0
5.9
0

5

1SS133

4.7K

R7016

22K

5

INVERTER COTROL IC
IC7001
BD9882FV-E2
1

DUTY

VCC

20

2.1

C7011

12.8

25V 1 B

SRT

N2

CT

SCP

INV GND

SS

FB

18

STB

11

VS

5.1

100

R7017

R7019

10K

10K

D7004
1SS133

D7012
MA111

CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,
CAUTION:FOR
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE 5A 32V(F7001)
UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
ATTENTION:POUR
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE 5A 32V(F7001)

A

B

2.8
3

10.3
4

1.5K

R7044

470K

2.8
5

4.8
6

IS_DET2

3

9.1
7

Vcc

GND
13

12
4.8

11
2.8

10
0

9
2.8

8
4.8

9.1

D7001

R7042

D7007

1SS133

470K

1SS133

D7002

C7021

1SS133

0.001 B
C7019

UDZSNP5.6B

D7010

C7006

2.2 B

560K 1/4W
56K

C7015

R7033
R7032

220

4.8
2

9.1

IS_DET1

2

PCB240
CEH421

CAUTION:F7001 IS MANUFACTURED BY SKYGATE CO.,LTD., TYPE 20N.
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C

6.8K

R7043

5A 32V

1

14

R7034

IS_DET1

INV_SGND

R7022

1K

H-33

1SS133

4.7K

100K +-1%

C7013

5.6K

INVERTER_H

1

D7008

470K

R7056

VS_DET

S

INV_SGND
R7006

FEED BACK
Q7003
3.7
G 2SK3018T106

R7030

0.1 B

C7001

18K

R7002

0

D

68K +-1%

0

1K +-1%

47K

270 +-1%

4.7K

LIGHT_CTL

R7025

2.7K

100K 1/4W

R7026

R7008

4.7K

R7003

0.001 B
R7021

R7011
R7001

R7004

R7041

R7018

R7014

2

D7005
1SS133
9.1

15K 1/4W

C7024
0.001 B

10K

FROM/TO POWER

0.001 B
R7054

C7035

4.7K

R7047
4.7K 1/4W

0.047 B

R7005

3

10

1.5

0.1 B

470K

COMP

R7048

0.1 B
C7010

C7020

3.1

0.001 B

0.47 B
C7009

D7011

0

0.001 B
R7040

13

C7008

FEED_BACK IC
IC7002
LM2902DR

IS

REG

0

12

9

0.0047
B

C7007

0
C7002

0

UDZSNP3.9B

14

0

0.1

4
R7023
10

330P CH

0.1

R7024

0

1.7

82K +-1%
1.1

0.0047
B

C7012
0.01 B

0

10

15

150K +-1%
C7003

3.1

16

R7013

PGND

5

33K +-1%
R7007

RT

17

1.5

N1

6

4

BCT

7

0.047 B
R7010

3

1.3

8

C7004

FAIL

4

2

BRT

19

1.5

100K

R7012
220 +-1%

R7020

R7009
47K +-1%

D

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

ARE

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

E

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

1

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

F

G

H

H-34

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(POWER PCB)

8

8

7

7

SOUND AMP IC
IC301
LA42052-E

6

Ripple
Filter IN1
1
2
7.4

1.6

6

GND

IN2

STB

P.P

Vcc

OUT2

NC

GND

NC

OUT1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

NC

0

NC 7.4

0

1.6

1.6

10.3

14.0

7.4

NC
HEADPHONE JACK
J301
PJ-364H

13
R308

NC
15

1K 1/4W

C303
1 B

R304

C310
FROM/TO POWER
FILTER_MUTE

16V470 MHE_P

1 B

POWER_ON_H

R310

2.2K

2.2K

R305

R307

2.2K

2.2K

C319

C320

0.1 B

0.1 B

W820

6
7

R311

R

1

1K

W830
SPEAKER

R302

W845

CD301
2.2K

4

5

3

1K

16

C311

ROUT

R306

L

2

16V470 MHE_P

C301

4

W823

1K 1/4W

LOUT

5

5

R309

FROM/TO JACK OUT

SOUND+B
16V470 MHE

4.7 B
C309

C307

6.3V 220 MHE_P
C308

C306 470P CH

C304

1

1

GND

2

2

GND

3

3

4

4

SP OUT R

W827
16V100 MHE_P
C305 470P CH

E8141801

SP OUT L

W824
HS301
763WSA0064

SP301
S0308F01

4

SPEAKER
SP302
S0308F01

W803
W832

W806

SOUND_GND

W030

GND

3

3

2

2

PCB240
CEH421

1

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-35

B

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C

1

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

D

ARE

E

F

G

H

H-36

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

JACK OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(POWER PCB)

8

8

7

7

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
J8102
RCA-341H(NI)-09

CVBS1

E
E

3

E

1

2
6 H
75

100P CH
R8108

75

100P CH
R8105

75

C8105

R8103

C8102

C8110

7

5

1
3

6
2

4
75

R8107

100P CH

MENU
SW2208

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

100

S-VIDEO-IN
J8101
DIN-417HA-01

YUV_R_IN
COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN
J8103
RCA-228H(3)NI-02

YUV_R_IN

1K

2

1K

R8114

4

R8113

AV1_R_IN
C8107

(REMOCON PCB)

4

5

YUV_L_IN

H

AV1_L_IN

H

CVBS1

470P CH

GND

R8112

AV1_C

E

5

S-DET

C

1

GND

AV1 R IN

5

E

6

1

100

3

GND

2

R8111

YUV_L_IN

YUV R IN

GND

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

W822

PCB270
CEH422

7

AV1 L IN

1K 1/4W

Y

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

YUV L IN

3

EVQ21505R

AV3_Y
AV1_C

8

4

1

R8110

C8109

GND

GND

820

S_DET

470P CH
C8111

10

2

75

AV1_Y

3

KEY_B

C8103

GND

11

5.6K

KEY_A

100P CH
R8104

12

R2206

CH UP/PLAY
SW2207

GND

R2205

5.6K

VOL UP
SW2206

GND
AV3_Y
AV1_C

R2204

15K

15
13

R2203

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

16
14

820

EVQ21505R

AV3_U

R2202

1K

VOL DOWN
SW2205

GND

17

R2201

EVQ21505R

18

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

INPUT
SW2204

AV3_V

EVQ21505R

GND

19

9

4

ROUT

20

POWER
SW2203

5

FROM/TO POWER
CP2201 (CD502)
A2001WR2-3P

ROUT

EVQ21505R

21

6

100

LOUT

EVQ21505R

GND

CH DOWN/STOP
SW2202

LOUT

22

4

(OPERATION PCB)

EJECT
SW2201

23

100
R8120

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

CP8101 (CP4301)
127301123K2

H

100
R8119

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]
FROM/TO JACK

H

R8118

AV3_Y

100P CH

6

5

MAIN_GND
W833

FROM/TO MICON

C8104

220
R

220

E
1
E

1K

3

R8117

3

E

AV1_R_IN

5

L

2

1K

4

R8116

7

AV1_L_IN

H

V

H

100

6 H

R8115

NC

4

CVBS1

75

3

R7604_1

R7603_1
B

6.3V 100 KA

ROUT

2

AT+3.3V

POWER ON LED 5
C7602

LOUT

1

GND
STANDBY LED

OS7601
KSM-2003TC2P
TO SOUND AMP

REMOCON IN

R8106

47

470P CH

B+ 3

R7602

CVBS_AV_IN
J8104
RCA-341H(2)NI-06

C8108

1

GND 2

100

470P CH

Vout

S_DET

3

R7605

C8106

GND

CP7601 (CD6203)
A2001WV2-5P

470P CH

FROM/TO POWER

R

ST-BY/POWER
D7601_1
LTL1BECBEK5

2

2

PCBDA0
CEH423

PCB240
CEH421

1

1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A

H-37

B

C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

D

E

F

G

H

H-38

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8

8

7

7

(SW PCB)
6

6

SW2
ESE22MH22

CD2301
2H061605
1

GND(SW)

2

5

PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH

3

FEED MOTOR(-)

4

FEED MOTOR(+)

5

SPINDLE MOTOR(-)

6

SPINDLE MOTOR(+)

M

M

M2602
BCZ3B05
M2601
JCV9B12

5

PCB640
DED020

4

4

3

3

2

2

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN
ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

1

1

A

H-39

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

H-40

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
8

E
1

2

5

P201-2476-2
CD501

AV3_Y

14

GND

13

13

AV1_C

12

12

GND

AV1_Y

11

11

AV1_Y

GND

10

10

GND

9

9

YUV L IN

8

8

GND

7

7

YUV R IN

SUB MICON
CP6201

CP2801

2
1

2

MODE

5

PC_TOOL_RX

3

GND

6

6

GND

CVBS1

5

5

CVBS1

SP OUT R

1

GND

4

4

GND

GND

2

2

AV1 L IN

3

3

AV1 L IN

GND

3

3

GND

2

2

GND

4

4

AV1 R IN

1

1

AV1 R IN

GND

16

LD(CD)

17

PD/GND

18

LD(DVD)

19

GND

20

NC

21

T DRV

22

T RTN

23

F DRV

24

F RTN

[Y]_VIDEO

8

8

[V]Y_VIDEO

9

9

GND

10

10

P.CON+3.3V

11

11

GND

12

12

P.CON+6V

13

13

GND

14

14

DVD_A_OUT_R

15

DVD_A_OUT_L

[U]C_VIDEO
START_SW
GND
SSCTXD/RX
SSCRXD/TX

CD3002

TX

CP8502

16

[V]Y_VIDEO

1

17

[U]C_VIDEO

GND
P.CON+3.3V

2

18

CP2803

DVD_STATUS_1

3

3

GND(D)

2

LD-

1

LD+

TDO

3

TMS

5

TDI

6

RESET_N

7

FLASH_WP

8

GND

ASEMD0

9

GND

10

VDD33

11

GND

7

M_GND

P.CON+32V

8

8

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

9

9

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

10

10

INVERTER_H

S_DET

11

11

S_DET

12

POWER_ON-H

CD3001

AT+12V

13

13

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

14

14

AT+5.8V

GND

15

15

GND

GND

16

16

GND

CS

GND

17

17

GND

GND

5

21

P.CON+3.3V

POWER_FAIL

18

18

POWER_FAIL

P.CON+A5V

6

22

P.CON+12V

KEY-A

19

19

KEY-A

P.CON+6V

7

23

P.CON+A5V

KEY-B

20

20

KEY-B

GND(M)

8

24

GND(M)

CD6203

2

E

NC
30

8

7

1

1

GND

2

2

GND

AT+3.3V

3

3

AT+3.3V

STANDBY LED

4

4

STANDBY LED

POWER ON LED 5

5

POWER ON LED

A

B

THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CAUTION:SINCE
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

C

NC

5

NC

6

LV

7

LV

8

HV

1

LV

2

NC

9

NC

10

LV

2

NC

11

HV

1

NC

12

NC

13

HV

14

5

CN2
4

OPERATION PCB
PCB270
CEH422

2

TM101
COMMAND TRANSMITTER

LCD PANEL

PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
ATTENTION:LES
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

ARE

D

1

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

H-41

4

3

LVDS

NOTE:THIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST ATTHE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NC

CN1

REMOCON IN

V2801

1

3

HEADPHONE JACK
J301

2

CD2804

2

NC

CP7601

REMOCON IN

REMOCON PCB
PCBDA0
CEH423

1

NC
29

COAXIAL
J4301
H

GND

RX0-

26

28

RX1+

25

27

GND

RX2-

24

RXCLK+
23

NC
20

GND

GND
19

RX3-

GND
18

22

VDD+5V
17

21

NC

VDD+5V

GND
14

16

RX0+
13

15

GND

RX112

RX2+

11

RXCLK9

10

GND

RX3+

NC

GND

NC
6

5

DVD MT PCB
PCB130
DMG097

1

NC

SP302
SPEAKER

HIGH VOLTAGE

DIGITAL PCB
PCBDH0
CEH420

VDD+5V

SP1+

6

7

20

4

SP1-

1

6

4

VDD+5V

SLD+

2

GND
M_GND

P.CON+12V

3

SLD-

3

AT+5.8V

RX

VDD+5V

4

AT+5.8V

5

19

2

LIMIT SW

4

5

3

CP2804

5

4

AT+5.8V

P.CON+3.3V

1

SW(GND)

AT+5.8V

POWER_ON-H 12

CP2303
6

AT+12V

L

OPEN

2

3

5

CLOSE

4

1

ASEBRKAK_N 4

CP2302
5

TCK
TRST_N

3

HV

KEY A

15

7

AT+12V

CD7005

FILTER_MUTE

3

VR(CD)

7

2

GND

14

START_SW

2

KEY B

VR COM

DVD_A_OUT_L 6

6

1

2

13

GND

CP501

1

1

VR(DVD)

5

5

CP3001
FILTER_MUTE

3

12

DVD_RESET

2

A

4

KEY A

11

DVD_A_OUT_R 4

9

1

B

3

GND

SP OUT L
POWER PCB
PCB240
CEH421

GND

VRF(RF_OUT)

GND
NC

KEY B

9
10

ZERO

3

DVD RESET

RESET

8

CP2201

SW1(DVD/CD)

7

1

8

D_GND

7

C

1

1

R

7

2

GND

CNVSS

6

D

6

3

6

2

ZERO

SCL

2

E

2

4

VCC

5

SPDIF-134

GND

RX

B+ 3

4

1

1

SPDIF-134

5

6

CD301

1

Vref

4

SDA

SP301
SPEAKER

GND 2

F

3

IIC_OFF

3

GND
YUV R IN

OS7601

2

4

VCC
CNVSS

CP3002

CP8501

GND

D3.3V

Vout

1

4

TX

PC_TOOL_TX

CD502

CP2301_1

5

1

6

7

6

YUV L IN

NC

7

GND

4

14

5

GND
AV1_C

COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN
J8103

E

GND

15

1

16

15

E

16

3

GND
AV3_Y

E

AV3_U

5

GND

17

H

18

17

2

18

7
CVBS_AV_IN
J8104

H

GND
AV3_U

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
J8102

4

AV3_V

6 H

GND

19

3

20

19

E

20

J501

5

4

GND
AV3_V

S-VIDEO-IN
J8101

6 H

ROUT

E

21

1

21

E

GND

ROUT

3

22

2

23

22

H

23

GND

E

H

4
2
LOUT

LOUT

H

7

CP8101

6

7

3

1

H

25

21 IF_OUT2

CP4301
24

IF_OUT1
20 IF_O

19 IF_AGC

18 IF_OUT

17 +5V

16 AFT

15 SCL

14 SDA

12 +30V

11 TU

9 +5V

8 V_OUT

NC
4

7 AGC

NC
3

5 SIF-out

NC
2

23

NC(BB)

22

TU5801

1

8

E

F

G

H

H-42

WAVEFORMS
MICON

SOUND AMP

20ns
200mV

10us
100mV

1ms
200mV

1

7

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

TUNER

20us
500mV

10us
0.5V

1ms
200mV

2

10us
0.5V

8

16

FLASH

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

20ns
200mV

10ns
500mV

3

10us
200mV

15

9

52

20ns
200mV

4

100µs
500mV

10

53

AV SWITCH
20us
500mV

2ms
100mV

5

200ns
1.0V

13

54

MEMORY
100µs
10us
100mV

2ms
100mV

500mV

55
6

14

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at
the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schemtic diagram.

I-1

WAVEFORMS
AUDIO/VIDEO
200µs
1.0V

56

200µs
1.0V

57

10µs
200mV

58

10µs
100mV

59

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured
at the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schematic diagram.

I-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
110

209

103B
103A

109

103C

111
207

207

207
108

103
207
207

125

102B
208
208

102B

104B

102A

104A

102
207

205

PCB270
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

104

205

202
202

122
120

PCB130
(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

208

208

205
118

106

208

208

PCB240
(POWER PCB ASS'Y)

206

107

119

206

123

PCBDH0
(DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

208

208

202
208

114

208

208
208

208

105E

124
117

116

208

105D 203

116
208

201

105D

203

113

203 202

208
208

208

101D
101G

105F 204

202

206

117

121
115

PCBDA0
(REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

105E
201
203

101E

105D
208

105C

101F

101C

101G

101

105A
105B

101G

101G

101A

105

112
101B

J1-1

J1-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)

133, 134, 135, 136,137,
CD501, TM101

127

129
127

126

132

130

128

131

128

J1-3

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW
600

608

601

608

CD2001
M2602
603

606
703

605
702
702
607

AA

703

605
703

Do not replace the parts. Because,
minute adjustments are needed if
this condition is disassembled
further more.
If the repair is needed, replace the
DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

701
602
SW2

604
704

PCB640
(SW PCB ASS'Y)
705

CLASS

MARK

GREASE

AA

CD2301

NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

Description

101
101A
101B
101C
101D
101E
101F
101G

AE009877
AE009878
AE009879
AE009880
AE009881
AE009882
AE009883
AE003760

7A7080011A
708WPD0010
702WNA0010
702WNA0009
713WPA0426
713WPA0431
761WPA0533
800WQ0A046

FRONT CABI ASS'Y
CABINET FRONT
SHEET SPEAKER-R
SHEET SPEAKER-L
GLASS LED
GLASS LED-2
HOLDER PANEL
FELT SHEET

102
102A
102B

AE009884
AE009885
AE009955

7A7020296A
702WPA1420
800WQ00122

BACK CABI ASS'Y
CABINET BACK
FELT SHEET

103
103A
103B
103C

AE009887
AE009888
AE009581
AE008459

7A7110048A
711WPD0768
711WPEA001
800WQ00105

PANEL SIDE ASS'Y
PANEL SIDE
SLOT DVD
FELT SHEET

104
104A
104B

AE009889
AE009890
AE009582

7A7110049A
711WPD0769
735WPAB101

PLATE BUTTON ASS'Y
PLATE BUTTON
BUTTON FRAME

105
105A
105B
105C
105D
105E
105F

AE009891
AE009892
AE009893
AE009894
AE009624
AE008947
AE007710

7A7040071A
704WPA0117
761WEA0039
761WSB0072
800SRA0002
899NAGCL14
89900FB118

STAND ASS'Y
STAND
FRAME STAND
ANGLE STAND
CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A
CABLE CLAMP
BAND

106
107
108
109

AE009895
AE009790
AE009896
75006982

752WSA0728
761WSA0679
702WPA1421
706WPAA007

SHIELD DIGITAL
ANGLE MPEG
COVER BACK
COVER CONNECTOR

110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

AE009897
AE009898
AE009899
AE009900
AE009901
AE005122
AE009597
AE009784
AE009902
AE009816

7225490281
7230008445
7235490100
724WND0001
724WND0002
726000A073
744WUA0029
744WUA0038
752WSA0727
753WUAA017

SHEET RATING
SHEET JACK
POP LABEL
SHEET PC-1
SHEET PC-2
SHEET CAUTION
SPRING EARTH-2
SPRING EARTH-3
SHIELD JACK
SPRING EARTH

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129

AE009904
AE009905
AE009906
AE009907
AE009908
72782476
AE009909
AE009910
AE009911
AE009912

761WPA0532
761WPA0534
761WSA0686
761WSA0687
761WSA0688
800WQ0A100
791WHA0171
792WHA0759
792WHA0760
792WHA0766

HOLDER REMOCON
COVER DVD
ANGLE HINGE
ANGLE LCD-L
ANGLE LCD-R
FELT SHEET
LAMIFILM BAG 650*700*0.5MM
PACKAGE TOP
PACKAGE BOTTOM
PACKAGE TOP CENTER

130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

AE009913
AE009603
AE009604
AE009914
AE009609
AE007451
AE007627
AE009915

793WCD1868
794WHA0003
794WHA0004
J51T0101A
JB5ND000
J3N51617A
J5S10229A
J51T0107A

GIFT BOX
HANDLE
HANDLE STOPPER
INSTRUCTION BOOK(TOSHIBA)
POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)
REGISTRATION CARD
INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA
QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209

72784217
AE005675
AE009612
AE007747
AE003526
AE003524
AE009613
AE004849
AE009916

810B140A0U
810923060U
8110K3080U
814623080U
810923080U
8109I30A0U
8109230A0S
8109230A0U
8117540C0S

SCREW SEMS(B) 4*10 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK
SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH
SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*30 BK

K1-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

Description

! 600

AE009615

A50N01P650

DVD MECHA ASS'Y

601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608

AE008499
AE005815
AE003551
AE005805
AE008500
AE008501
AE005816
BZ710149

92SBB0033A
92AAA0017A
92P100088A
92P100117A
92P200017A
92P200018A
92P100116A
800WFAA008

LOADER SUB ASS'Y
FEED RACK ASS'Y
GEAR,MOTOR
GEAR,MIDDLE
INSULATOR, F
INSULATOR, R
GEAR,FEED
CUSHION C

701
702
703
704
705

AE005817
AE003554
AE003555
AE005006
AE003557

92P700007A
814011723U
816112080U
813381750U
811022080U

SCREW,GEAR FEED
SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH
SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH
SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001
CD2301
M2602
PCB640
SW2

AE009434
AE003558
AE009616
AE008503
AE001158

12C14O1602
122H062102
1515T98006
A5X002C640
0500101036

CORD JUMPER
CORD JUMPER
MOTOR
SW PCB ASS'Y
PUSH SWITCH

K2-1

A50N01P650
DLM1D29-31

FFC05241600408T1-A04
2H062102
WRF-300CA-10460A
DED020A
ESE22MH22

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

Description
RESISTORS

R503
R505
R506
R509
R510
R512
R544
R545
R546
R547
R3019

75006901
AE009485
AE002150
AE009486
AE005735
AD301018
AE009808
AE009808
AE009808
AE009808
AE009917

RC31X1126J
R63884330J
R803R9333J
RC31X1125J
R63881R22J
R002T2104J
R861R42R0F
R861R42R0F
R861R42R0F
R861R42R0F
R808R9123J

RC
R,FUSE
RC
RC
R,FUSE
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
C506
C507
C508
C510
C513
C514
C518
! C520
! C522
! C525
C7030
C7033

AE001725
AE009490
79091384
AE009918
AE001732
BZ110025
AD301026
BZ110035
AD301026
BZ110176
AE000308
AE009492
AE009919
AE009920
AE009920
AE009700
AE009700

CS0PB0413K
E8E52C271D
CS0PCH4L2J
E83YF1222D
CS0PCH4H1J
P2122B224M
CD39E0M13M
P2122B104M
CD39E0M13M
C03L0R7Q2K
CD39B0MQ2K
P332E4223J
E7ESU54R7M
E83YF2102D
E83YF2102D
C234SLB11J
C234SLB11J

CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CMP
CC
CMP
CC
CC
CC
CPP
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC

! D504
! D505
D506
! D507
! D508
D509
! D510
! D511
D512
! D514
! D515
! D516
D517
! D518
D519
D520
D521
D522
! D523
D526
D2303
D2304
D3004
D3005
D3006
D3007
D3402
D3403
D4002
D4003
D4005
D4008
D5803
D5804
D6205
D7001
D7002
D7003
D7004
D7005
D7006
D7007
D7008
D7010
D7011

BZ410031
BZ410085
AE008906
BZ410062
BZ410062
AE009494
BZ410062
AE008319
AE002133
BZ410126
AE009803
AE008319
AD300070
BZ410062
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009829
BZ410113
AE009006
AE009006
AE004643
AE009496
AE004643
AE009496
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
AE004795
AE009922

D6CE24110A
D2WXN40050
D28R11FS20
D2WTRM11C0
D2WTRM11C0
DE7RB3302B
D2WTRM11C0
D4AT01H3E0
D2BXARS010
D2WXRU3AM0
D28A10A080
D4AT01H3E0
D97U01201B
D2WTRM11C0
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
D28A10A040
D97U02201B
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
D28R1QS040
D28R11FS40
D28R1QS040
D28R11FS40
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
DE7RB5R62B
DE7RB3R92B

DIODE VARISTA
DIODE SILICON
DIODE
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE ZENER
DIODE SILICON
DIODE RECTIFIER
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER
DIODE RECTIFIER
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER
DIODE ZENER
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE
DIODE SCHOTTKY
DIODE
DIODE SCHOTTKY
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE ZENER
DIODE ZENER

D7012
D7013
D7014
D7015
D7017
D7018
D7019
D7020

AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
BZ410006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006
AE009006

DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
D1VT001330
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110

DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON

CAPACITORS

DIODES

12M OHM 1W
33 OHM 1/4W
33K OHM 1/16W
1.2M OHM 1W
0.22 OHM 1W
100K OHM 1/2W
2 OHM 1/4W
2 OHM 1/4W
2 OHM 1/4W
2 OHM 1/4W
12K OHM 1/16W
0.001 UF 50V B
270 UF 200V
330 PF 50V CH
2200 UF 10V
22 PF 50V CH
0.22 UF 275V ECQUL
0.001 UF 250V
0.1 UF 275V ECQUL
0.001 UF 250V
470 PF 2KV R
470 PF 250V
0.022 UF 400V
4.7 UF 50V
1000 UF 16V
1000 UF 16V
10 PF 6KV SL
10 PF 6KV SL
ENE241D-10A-Q6
1N4005-EIC
EC11FS2-TE12L
RM11C-EIC
RM11C-EIC
UDZSNP33B TE-17
RM11C-EIC
1H3-E
SARS01-V1
RU3AM-EIC
FCHS10A08
1H3-E
MTZJ12B T-77
RM11C-EIC
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
FCQ10A04
MTZJ22B T-77
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
EC31QS04-TE12L
EC11FS4-TE12L
EC31QS04-TE12L
EC11FS4-TE12L
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
UDZSNP5.6B TE-17
UDZSNP3.9B TE-17

DIODES

K3-1

MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
1SS133T-77
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

Description
DIODES

D7023
D7024
D7601
D8510

AE009006
AE009006
AE009923
AE009006

DGERMA1110
DGERMA1110
0021E91030
DGERMA1110

DIODE SILICON
DIODE SILICON
LED
DIODE SILICON

IC301
IC501
IC502
IC503
IC505
IC2301
IC2801
IC2802
IC2804
IC2805
IC3001
IC3002
IC3003
IC3007
IC3009
IC4001
IC4005
IC4007
IC5801
IC6201
IC6202
IC6551
IC6552
IC6553
IC6554
IC6555
IC6556
IC6557
IC6558
IC7001
IC7002
IC8501
IC8502

AE008430
AE009499
AD302211
AE009500
AE002809
AE008194
AE009656
AE009502
AE009924
AE009925
AE009505
AE008435
AE008916
AE008431
AE009506
AE009720
AE008324
AE009926
AE004647
79097849
AE009927
AE009511
AD301988
AD301988
AD301988
AD301988
AE009928
BZ611139
BZ611139
AE009512
AE009513
AE009365
AE009805

I03SP20520
ICAD055310
I1KJ9A431A
I03F9797M0
000220002W
I03FV65650
I56M069540
IGGM061600
S51T01PF01
S51T01PE01
I07F091300
I1LF010150
I0GF95ZN10
I07F078200
I5HJ0170B0
ICQK06966A
IF9J0164AG
S51T01PF02
I01FF58320
I9UF032290
S34L01PM02
IC1J053580
I0UF015010
I0UF015010
I0UF015010
I0UF015010
I55F0A53FU
I0QF02534V
I0QF02534V
I07F098820
I0CF0902D0
I0QF045650
I1YF9117A0

SOUND AMP 5W 2CH
LOW STANDBY POWER IC CONTROL
VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE
CHARGE POMP CONTROL
PHOTO COUPLER
5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC
SCALER
DDR2-667 256M CL=5
MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 32M BOOT
MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K 12C
1CH DC-DC CONVERTER
DC-DC CONVERTER CONTROLLER
VO=0.8-3.5V I=1.5A TAPING
VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A
REGULATOR VO=3.3V IO=800MA
VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP
1M*16*4BANK(64M) 143MHZ SDRAM
MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 16M B00T
USA STEREO
RESET IC 2.9V TYPE

! Q501
Q503
Q504
Q505
Q2301
Q2302
Q3001
Q3002
Q3003
Q3004
Q3005
Q3006
! Q3007
Q3008
! Q3009
! Q3010
! Q3011
Q3407
Q4301
Q5801
Q5802
Q6201
Q6202
Q6203
Q6204
Q7001
! Q7002
Q7003
! Q7004
! Q7005

72783392
79097796
BZ510067
BZ510108
AE008330
AE008330
BZ510071
BZ510107
BZ510067
BZ510067
BZ510071
AE005049
AE008441
BZ510071
AE008933
AE009514
AE008933
BZ510071
BZ510109
AE009515
AE009515
AE009515
AE009515
BZ510072
BZ510071
BZ510067
AE008330
BZ510113
AE009929
AE009929

TJXG10NK50
TPATC03002
TNAAC05002
TAAA1504SY
TAAA1505SY
TAAA1505SY
TNAAB05003
TPAAA05001
TNAAC05002
TNAAC05002
TNAAB05003
TNAAA05001
TAAA01664Y
TNAAB05003
TJ5MC61080
TJ7T35P020
TJ5MC61080
TNAAB05003
TCAA3875SY
T27T030190
T27T030190
T27T030190
T27T030190
TPAAC05002
TNAAB05003
TNAAC05002
TAAA1505SY
T27T030180
TJ3MSS2750
TJ3MSS2750

FET
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR SILICON
TRANSISTOR SILICON
TRANSISTOR SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR SILICON
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
FET
FET
FET
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR SILICON
FET
FET
FET
FET
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
COMPOUND TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR SILICON
FET
FET
FET

! L501
L503
L504
L3001
L3002
L3003
L3004
L3005
L5801
L5805
L8501
L8502
! T501

AE005143
BZ310150
AD301785
BZ310150
AE009517
BZ310150
AE009518
BZ310150
72784092
AE009260
AE008874
AE006570
AE009520

029X000416
02167E220K
02167E100K
02167E220K
0218MG5R2P
02167E220K
0218MG220P
02167E220K
0216SD220J
021AS9224J
0216SD2R2J
0216SD1R0J
0481240018

COIL,LINE FILTER
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING

!
!
!
!
!
!

!
!
!
!
!

!

ICS

MEMORY DATA FLASH MICOM ROM16K 2KX2 RAM1

A/D CONVERTER
A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT
A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT
A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT
A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT
A/V SW 2IN 1OUT
A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT
A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT
19WLCD INVERTER IC
QUAND OPERATIONNAL AMPLIFILE
DUAL OPEAMP
VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING

TRANSISTORS

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

K3-2

MA111-(TX)
MA111-(TX)
LTL1BECBEK5
MA111-(TX)
LA42052-E
FA5531P-A2
KIA431A-AT
LA5797M-TE-L-E
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
LA6565VR-TLM-E
R8J66954BG
HYB18TC256160BF-3S
EN29LV320AB-70TCP
M24256-BWMN6TP
BD9130NV
AL1015
PQ035ZN1HZPH
BD7820FP-E2
S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
ZR36966ELCG-D-G
M12L64164A-7TG
SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
AN5832SA-E1V
PST3229NR
R5F21124FP
AK5358A
MM1501XNRE
MM1501XNRE
MM1501XNRE
MM1501XNRE
TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T)
NJM2534V(TE2)
NJM2534V(TE2)
BD9882FV-E2
LM2902DR
NJM4565M(TE1)
LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R
STF10NK50Z
KRA103MAT
KRC103SRTK
KTA1504S_Y_RTK
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
KRC102SRTK
KRA101SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KRC102SRTK
KRC101S-RTK
KTA1664-Y-RTF/P
KRC102SRTK
TPC6108
RTQ035P02-TR
TPC6108
KRC102SRTK
KTC3875S_Y_RTK
2SK3019_TL
2SK3019_TL
2SK3019_TL
2SK3019_TL
KRA103SRTK
KRC102SRTK
KRC103SRTK
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
2SK3018T106
FSS275-TL-E
FSS275-TL-E
SS24H-10100
22 UH
10 UH
22 UH
5.2 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
0.22 UH
2.2 UH
1 UH
81240018

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.
! T7001
! J301
! J501
J4301
J8101
J8102
J8103
J8104

AE009521

048135109G

Description
COILS &TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING

JACKS

AE009522
AE009523
AE009524
AE009526
AE009527
AE009528
AE009529

060R131024
064Q1A0010
060R401140
062R750007
060R411058
060R431039
060R431040

HEADPHONE JACK
JACK,AC
RCA JACK
PLUG
RCA JACK
RCA JACK
RCA JACK

SW2201
SW2202
SW2203
SW2204
SW2205
SW2206
SW2207
SW2208

BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010
BZ612010

0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34
0504101T34

SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT
SWITCH,TACT

PCB130
PCB240
PCB270
PCBDA0
PCBDH0

AE009931
AE009932
AE009933
AE009934
AE009935

A51T01P130
A51T01P240
A51T01P270
A51T01PDA0
A51T01PDH0

DVD MT PCB ASS'Y
POWER PCB ASS'Y
OPERATION PCB ASS'Y
REMOCON PCB ASS'Y
DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y

BZ310129
AE008552
AE008878
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009536
AE009374
AE009374
AE009374
AE009374
AE009374
AE009374
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008878
AE008609
AE008609
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008552
AE008395
AE008395
AE008609
AE008609
AE008609
AE008610
AE009374
AE008609
AE008609
AE008395
AE008878
AE008394
AE008552
AE008394
AE008552
AE008217
AE008217
AE009733
AE009538
AE009936

024HT03564
024NC51021
024HC51816
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC52216
024HC51216
024HC51216
024HC51216
024HC51216
024HC51216
024HC51216
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51816
024HC51023
024HC51023
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024NC51021
024HC56005
024HC56005
024HC51023
024HC51023
024HC51023
024HC51513
024HC51216
024HC51023
024HC51023
024HC56005
024HC51816
024BC5121J
024NC51021
024BC5121J
024NC51021
141U004016
141U004016
06E8141801
120Q119905
06E8231001

CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
BATTERY,MANGAN
BATTERY,MANGAN
CORD CONNECTOR
CORD SET AC
CORD CONNECTOR

B501
B2305
B2800
B2803
B2804
B2805
B2806
B2807
B2808
B2809
B2810
B2811
B2815
B2816
B2817
B2820
B2821
B2822
B3003
B3004
B3005
B3006
B3007
B3008
B3014
B3015
B3017
B3022
B3023
B4001
B4002
B4003
B4005
B4006
B4008
B4010
B4015
B4016
B4301
B4302
B5801
B5802
B5803
B5804
B6551
B6552
B6553
B6554
B6556
B8501
B8502
B8503
B8504
BT001
BT002
CD301
! CD501
CD502

SWITCHES

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-3

8135109G
PJ-364H
CCT2302-0901C
RCA-101HT(OR)
DIN-417HA-01
RCA-341H(NI)-09
RCA-228H(3)NI-02
RCA-341H(2)NI-06
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
DMG097A
CEH421A
CEH422A
CEH423A
CEH420A
W4BRH3.5X6X1.0
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-221T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-121T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
FCM1608CF-600T06
FCM1608CF-600T06
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-151T06
HCB1608KF-121T20
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608CF-600T06
HCB1608KF-181T20
BLM18PG121SN1D
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
BLM18PG121SN1D
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
MNAAA(R03)
MNAAA(R03)
E8141801
P201-2476-2
E8231001

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No.

!
!

!
!
!
!
!

CP501
CD2804
CD3001
CD3002
CD6203
CD7005
CP2201
CP2301
CP2302
CP2303
CP2801
CP2803
CP2804
CP3001
CP3002
CP4301
CP6201
CP7601
CP8101
CP8501
CP8502
CUS151
EL2401
F501
F7001
FH501
FH502
NR2801
NR2802
NR2803
NR2804
NR2805
NR2806
NR2807
NR2808
NR2809
NR2810
NR2811
NR3601
NR3602
NR6551
OS7601
SH501
SP301
SP302
TH501
TM101
TU5801
V2801
X2801
X2802
X4001
X6201
X6551

AE009937
AE009938
AE009939
AE009940
AE009941
AE009942
AD301795
AE008156
AE009544
AE009545
BZ614485
BZ614214
AE009548
AE009937
AE009944
AE008886
BZ614458
AD300752
AE008882
AE009553
AD301796
BZ710279
BZ614043
79101691
AE004626
AE002634
AE002634
AE009554
AE009554
AE009554
AE009554
AE009555
AE009555
AE009555
AE009555
AE009555
AE009556
AE009556
AE009945
AE009945
AE009557
AE009947
AE009776
AE009558
AE009558
AE009559
AE009560
AE009623
AE009948
AE009563
AE009564
AE009566
75006971
AE009567

069S2K0739
06CHRU1803
06E82K1701
06E82O1101
06E8252002
06E82E0604
069S230639
069KYOT159
069EV5T060
069EV6T060
069S270629
069S2B0629
069S2U0739
069S2K0739
069S2O0739
06CK7N0301
069S290629
069S250629
06977NM020
06GG2E0019
069S280629
800WFAA006
124116281A
081PC04005
083LA05007
06710T0009
06710T0009
11074100M7
11074100M7
11074100M7
11074100M7
11074270M7
11074270M7
11074270M7
11074270M7
11074270M7
11074220M7
11074220M7
110P4472M5
110P4472M5
11074470M7
077Q038007
126D000045
070Y433004
070Y433004
DSQDNE5R0L
076D0LT030
0164100027
09EV115008
100GT02728
100GT02509
100GT02727
100GT01615
100DT01217

Description
MISCELLANEOUS

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CORD CONNECTOR
CORD CONNECTOR
CORD CONNECTOR
CORD CONNECTOR
CORD CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CORD CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CUSHION A
EYE LET
FUSE
FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
R,NETWORK
REMOTE RECEIVER
TERMINAL PIN
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
THERMISTOR
TRANSMITTER
DIGITAL TUNER
LCD
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL

RESISTOR
RC............... CARBON RESISTOR
CAPACITORS
CC............... CERAMIC CAPACITOR
CE............... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR
CP............... POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CPP............. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
CPL............. PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMP............ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CMPL.......... METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMPP.......... METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K3-4

A2006WV0-2X10P
CHRU1803
E82K1701
E82O1101
E8252002
E82E0604
A2001WR2-3P
LD07T2-24ND-03
04_6232_105_015_800+
04_6232_106_015_800+
A2001WV2-7P
A2001WV2-11P
A2006WV0-2X15P
A2006WV0-2X10P
A2006WV0-2X12P
TWG-P23P-A1
A2001WV2-9P
A2001WV2-5P
127301123K2
A2001WR-14A
A2001WV2-8P
XRY16X28BD
51MS040L
1206FA5A-T
EYF-52BCY
EYF-52BCY
CRA108100JV
CRA108100JV
CRA108100JV
CRA108100JV
CRA108270JV
CRA108270JV
CRA108270JV
CRA108270JV
CRA108270JV
CRA108220JV
CRA108220JV
4D02WGJ0472TCE
4D02WGJ0472TCE
CRA108470JV
KSM-2003TC2P
YQ-12
S0308F01
S0308F01
5D2-08LCS
000-103000530
ENG36E18KRF
M156B1-L02
SMD-49 C27000B030
SMD-49 C25000H025
SMD-49 C27000J029
B16000E007
DS0321SRAB

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Create Date                     : 2008:07:31 15:24:12+07:00
Creator Tool                    : PageMaker 6.5J
Modify Date                     : 2008:08:26 11:03:45-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:08:26 11:03:45-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : atiya
Title                           : 51T-01P COVER.p65
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.0J (Windows 版)
Document ID                     : uuid:552f2121-733e-42d8-b60e-47301554262b
Instance ID                     : uuid:7adb3dea-449e-4bf5-88a5-a78d61a9bc9f
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 100
Author                          : atiya

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toshiba 15Lv505 Service Manual 51T 01P COVER.p65

15LV505 15LV505

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation